Home

PM plus Ver. 5.20 UM - Renesas Electronics

1. BR E W850_test testl c Changed ifist 0 break Pe yvoid subtunccopy lint Displays type return values abd arguments of the function subtunccopy void main twvoid static unsigned int st unsigned char nOnt PTSTA woth 180 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Data creation When a new file is created and not yet assigned a file name or when a file is being edited and not yet saved any functions added as a result of editing are reflected in the smart lookup function as data The timing for creating data used by the smart lookup function is as follows When a file is saved When the Smart Look up Function Use is checked When a file is saved automatically before a build only modified files When a workspace is opened Caution A function name cannot be recognized with the compiler control instructions indicated below When the function name differs according to the value of ifdef void Hifdef ENGLISH FncEng Helse Fncdapan Hendi f Lint Cnt int Made 1 When function name extends over 2 lines with void Function Name Lint Cnt int Made 1 When variable declaration is performed between function name and Hifdef ENGLISH int maini argc arev int argc char arev i In the case of a function name without a return value such as shown below the character on the preced
2. Displays the help file for each tool The menu item names differ for each tool When a project is opened its menu items are added Stars the PM plus help Starts the PM plus help to display the topic of the Main window Starts the PM plus help to display the topic of the currently active window Lists the shortcut keys specified for the PM plus menu items Opens the Shortcut List dialog box Accesses the NEC microprocessor web site http www necel com micro index_e html Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 1 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Plus Settings Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 2 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Plus Settings Displays the help topic specified in External HELP 3 on the Path tub displayed by selecting the Tool gt PM Plus Settings Displays the version information about PM plus 158 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool bar The tool bar is a collection of buttons that can execute often used commands with a single action The kind of tool bar is as follows a b C d Standard bar Build bar Option bar External tool bar The standard bar and the build bar can be customized with the Tool menu gt Customize a Standard bar The standard bar consists of the buttons that are related to the operation or the mod
3. Select the Layer Rule button in the Insert File dialog box 248 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Apply Layer Rule Select the coding to be subjected to the layer rule By default all check boxes are checked The layer rule for each item is follows switch case default for while do while const struct Function PreProcessor b Preview For an if statement or else if statement the lines from that following of if to are indented If is followed by a source coding the lines up to that preceding are indented The contents of a switch statement are indented The lines after a case statement are indented up to the next case statement or default state ment default statement the lines up to that preceding are indented The lines from that following of a for statement to are indented The lines from that following of a while statement to are indented The lines from that following a do statement to the last line of the while statement are indented The lines following a const statement are indented The lines following a struct statement are indented The lines from that following a function definition line to the end of the function are indented The lines from that following a preprocessor instruction to that preceding the next preproces sor instruction or to that preceding endif are indented However elsei
4. Select the View menu gt Output Window Explanation of each area a Execution status display area This area displays the execution status of the make file during build processing Tag Jump function When a caret is placed on an error or warning line in the Output window double clicking the left mouse button will make tag jump from the line at the caret position to the corresponding error or warning line When a caret is placed on an error or warning number pressing the F1 key will display the help topic for the corre sponding error or warning However this function is valid only when CA850 V2 50 or later is used User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 185 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Operations performed with the right mouse button When you click the right mouse button in the Output window the following menu items are displayed These menu items can be modified with Tool menu gt Customize Copy Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Clear Clears the contents of the Output window Find Searches for the specified character string Find in Project Searches for the specified character string within the source files and the header files registered to a project Fix Window Fixes the location of the Output window Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the Output window When dropping a workspace file prw extension
5. Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Debugger Select the debugger to be used from the drop down list All the NEC Electronics debuggers that have been installed are displayed in the drop down list together with the corresponding series name When a debugger is selected from this list the file name of the debugger is displayed in the File Name text box and the selected debugger will start up automatically when a debug operation is executed If you wish to change the debugger to be used after exiting the wizard select the Tool menu gt Debugger Set ting 2 File name The file name of the debugger to be used for debugging is displayed When the debugger is selected by the Debugger drop down list that file name is displayed with the path automatically If you wish to change the path select the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings 3 Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 55 56 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box The contents of the specification are confirmed and the wizard for creating a new workspace is terminated Figure 5 9 New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation Dialog Box New WorkSpace Step 6 8 Confirmation Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 The display of the settings The various information specified with this wizard for cr
6. 14 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 16 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth upward Selecting the Find menu gt Same Layer Line Up moves the caret to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line above the caret in the upward direction if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that Same Layer Line Up menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 17 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth downward Selecting the Find menu gt Same Layer Line Down moves the caret to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line below the caret in the downward direction if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that Same Layer Line Down menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 18 Moving the caret to the position before a jump Selecting the F
7. 5 Regular Expression If this box is checked regular expressions are supported in global searching Expression Description Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation X or Y appears selection Same as X X appears one or more times Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Tab character t Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for 242 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E
8. Movement of lines by dragging of mouse Insertion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Deletion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Layer gt Promote Layer gt Demote 5 2 2 Canceling an Undo operation Selecting the Edit menu gt Redo cancels the effect of an Undo operation and restores the previous state Up to 1 024 edit operations can be redone Redo is effective for the following edit operations Entry of characters into the Edit window The key input is canceled for each one character including the TAB DEL BS and ENTER key File gt Insert file Edit gt Cut Edit gt Paste Edit gt Paste Special Edit gt Delete Edit gt Delete the Line Edit gt Insert New Object Replacement of a character string using Find gt Replace except Replace All Copying of lines by dragging of mouse Movement of lines by dragging of mouse 66 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Insertion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Deletion of a tab character at the beginning of a line Layer gt Promote Layer gt Demote 5 2 3 Cutting off character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Cut sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them from the Edit window If the lines selected with range selec
9. Select the Add button in the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files Explanation of each area a Lookin This area displays the folder that includes the macro file to be registered The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM plus was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab 370 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be added Only a file name with extension imc can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name c Title This area specifies the title of the registered macro Up to 32 characters can be set The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu Function buttons Open Adds the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 371 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to change the stored contents of a macro file Figure 6 108 Change t
10. Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Workspace File Name Specify the name of the file to save the workspace information Up to 255 characters can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name The file extension is prw If the extension is omitted it is automatically set to prw The file name which changed the workspace file extension prw to prj is assigned as the project file name In addition if a existing workspace file name is specified the existing workspace file will be renamed as backup file e g test prw gt test prw bak after the Next gt button is clicked Then the message dialog box whether to create a new workspace file will be displayed If Create Blank Workspace is checked only a workspace is created In this case Project Group Name Series Name and Device Name become invalid User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 43 2 44 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Folder Specify the folder in which the workspace file and project file are stored Selecting the Browse button opens the Browse for Folder dialog box in which to specify the project folder posi tion The folder in which PM plus exe exists is default folder Project Group Name Specify the name of the project group to be displayed on the Project window Up to 260 characters can be speci fied If the specification of this area is omitted the name of the project group displayed on the Pro
11. xls or Wk KW Function buttons Adds the specified files to the Other Files folder Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 2 3 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Properties dialog box This dialog box is used to displays the path information and read attribute of the selected file Figure 6 53 Properties Dialog Box Properties EJ File Hame test oc Path Hame C V850_test Last Update 2003 05 12 19 15 16 Attribute Read nly IDL File A850 testiT est idl This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Project Settings with a file function name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Information area File Name and Path Name Displays the name and the location of the selected file with the full path Last Update Displays the date and time of the last update Attribute This is displayed when the selected file has a read attribute IDL File If the selected file is a source file generated from an IDL file the IDL file name is displayed with the relative path starting from the source file 214 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes this dialog User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 275 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add New Memo dialog box This dialog box is used t
12. 1 insert 1 insertreturn return else continue go back to top of while cnt add cnt msgbox lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string to be displayed with Caution If the OK button is selected the message box closes x getchar x Character string type variable Return values One character or character string returned at the caret x istitle x Integer type variable Return values 1 Title line 0 Not title line User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Checking the title line at the caret expand collapse Checking the first line at the caret Checking the last line at the caret Checking the end of line Checking the end of file EOF Obtaining the column position of the caret tab character 1 charac ter Obtaining the column position of the caret tab character specified number of space characters Obtaining the line position of the caret excluding collapsed layers Obtaining the line position of the caret including collapsed layers Checking the em size character at the caret CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Command Format x Istitleopen x Integer type variable Return values 1 The layer of the title line is expanded O The layer of the title line is collapsed x istop x Integer type variable Return values 1 Top line 0 Not top line x isbottom x Integer type variabl
13. AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AWG AWG AW EEX tidata byte tibss byte tidata word ti bss word tidata ti bss sidata Si bss data sdata Sbss bss The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Use RX850 Pro and Use External memory are selected Sample link directive file use rx850pro use external memory copyright and other notices SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBI TS A sconst Ji SYSTEM LOAD RX system PROGBITS AX system system cmn PROGBITS 7AX system_cmn system int PROGBITS AX system int iS TEXT ILOAD RX pro_epi_ runtime PROGBITS 7AX pro_ epi runtime text PROGBITS 7AX text i DATA LOAD RW V0x100000 data PROGBI TS 7AW data sdata PROGBITS AWG sdata SDSS NOBITS TAWG sbss Dss NOBITS TAW bSS ie CONST LOAD R const PROGBITS A const iz SIT ILOAD R Sit PROGBITS 7A siti SEDATA LOAD RW VOxff6000 Sedata PROGBITS 7AW sedata sebss NOBITS TAW sebss ie SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidata byte PROGBITS 7AW tidata byte tibss byte NOBITS 7AW tibss byte tidata word PROGBI TS 7AW tidata word tibss word NOBI TS TAW tibss word tidata PROGBI TS TAW tidata tibss NOBI TS TAW t
14. Device Install This will set up the basic Information about the project b Required field 4 Back Cancel Help Setting items The items to be set are displayed in this area Function description and cautions The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area This area is not displayed in the Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box Current position of wizard flow The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area i gt gt i mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 93 d 94 Function buttons Button Next gt Cancel Help CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Function Returns to the previous wizard step This button is always disabled in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection This button appears as Finish button in the Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation dia log box In this case terminates this wizard for adding a new project and creates the work space and the project file belonging to that workspace in accordance with the displayed information Stops the operation for adding a new project and returns to its previous status in whi
15. Edit 114 143 153 Copy 67 143 Copy for Append Cut 67 148 Cut for Append 69 143 Delete the Line 69 144 Delete the Word 69 144 Delete to the End of Line Delete to the End of Word Delete to the Top of Line 67 143 67 143 Delete 69 144 69 144 69 144 Grouping by Keyword 71 144 Image Copy 68 143 Insert New Object 71 144 Link 71 145 Make Function Prototypes Object 145 Paste 68 143 Paste Special Redo 66 143 71 144 68 143 Restore Color of Grouping Lines 71 144 Select All 70 144 Select to the End of Line 70 144 Select to the End of Word 70 144 Select to the Top of Line 70 144 Select to the Top of Word 70 144 Select to the Word 70 144 Undo 66 143 Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box 360 Edit Command dialog box 311 Edit Functions 66 Edit menu 143 Edit User keyword dialog box 358 Edit window 176 Character input 177 Copying lines layers 179 Definitions of words 177 Drag and drop function 182 Moving lines layers 178 Opening 176 Operations performed with the right mouse button 179 Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button 179 Range selection 178 Restrictions on the Edit window 182 Scrolling 179 Smart lookup function 180 Entry Macro Files dialog box 368 Exit PM plus 65 142 Exiting 31 Expand 84 149 Expand All 85 149 Expand All Lower La
16. Q2500 Do you wish to stop building all projects No will stop building project only The Stop Build command was selected while batch build was being executed Yes Stop all building and return to the active window No Stop only the build currently being executed and execute build for the next project Cancel Cancel stopping build and continue Q2501 s The file was not found Do you wish to build it The load module file downloaded to the debugger could not be found s indicates the load module file name Download it after executing build Yes Download after build No Start the debugger without executing build Cancel Return to the active window without doing anything Q2600 This file already exists Do you wish to replace it The file specified to be overwritten and saved by the macro already exists Yes Overwrite the file No Do not overwrite the file Q2700 PM plus has finished comparing the file s Do you wish to continue it from the top of file When comparing the files comparison finished at the last line s indicates the file name Yes Compare from the start No Do nothing Q2701 PM plus has finished comparing the file s Do you wish to continue it from the last of file When comparing the files comparison finished at the start s indicates the file name Yes Compare from the last line No Do nothing Q2702 Set the default font This is applied to create
17. The IDL file is likely to be damaged Check if the file is damaged or not F0103 Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file Make sure that the correct path and filename given or disk space The specified path is invalid the file name is illegal or the specified disk is full Check the path and specify a valid one If illegal characters have been used for the file name use legal ones If the disk is full free up memory Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 383 384 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0104 Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file The original source file by IDL file cannot be opened When changing the name of a source file generated by IDL the original source file could not be opened Check the path for the source file and specify the correct path using Change Source File Name from the File menu F0105 Failed to open the project file Cannot accentuate the register The project file could not be found or the project file could not be opened because it is damaged Check the path for the project file or verify that the project file is not damaged F0106 Failed to open the device file Cannot accentuate the register The device file could not found or the device file could not be opened because it is damaged Check the path for the device file or verify that the device file is not damaged F0107 Failed to read the device file Make sure that this file has broken A rea
18. The name of the source file to be output When editing an IDL file Displays For Help press F1 in the default condition b Character code type Displays the character code type used for the file currently edited c Line feed code type Displays the line feed code type used for the file currently edited 162 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d Key input mode Displays the key input mode In the overwrite mode OVER is displayed e Depth of layers Displays the depth of the layers at the current caret position f Number of columns Displays the number of columns at the caret position g Number of lines Displays the number of lines at the current caret position Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the main frame When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file ca
19. This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Find menu gt To a Specific Line Select the To a Specific Line button on the tool bar Explanation of each area a Line No Specify a destination line number A jump to the specified line is performed by clicking the OK button b Valid The valid range is from the first line to the last line on the display The operation is as follows according to the status of Release Range Selected Before Jump check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Checked If there is a range selection in the Edit window the range selection is released and the caret is moved to the top of the specified line Not checked If there is a range selection in the Edit window the range selection will cover from the start position to the specified line If however a layer higher than that of the line at which the range selection starts appears between the start position and the specified line the range selection will cover until just before the higher layer line User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 229 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Makes a jump to the specified line Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 230 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Jump to Specified Line in the S
20. User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 5 10 Help Functions 131 5 10 1 Starting up the PM plus help 131 5 10 2 Displaying the help of the Main window 131 5 10 3 Displaying the help of a current window 131 5 10 4 Displaying a list of shortcut keys 131 5 10 5 Accessing to NEC Electronics microprocessor web site 131 5 10 6 Starting up a external help 1 131 5 10 7 Starting up a external help 2 131 5 10 8 Starting up a external help 3 131 5 10 9 Displaying the version information about PM plus 132 CHAPTER6 WINDOW REFERENCE 133 6 1 Window Composition 133 6 2 Explanation of Windows Dialog boxes 138 Main window 139 Project window 164 Edit window 176 Search result display window 183 Output window 185 Open dialog box 187 Insert File dialog box 190 Open Workspace dialog box 193 Save As dialog box 195 Save Source Files Options dialog box 197 Change Source File Names dialog box 199 Change Selected Source File Name dialog box 201 Change Selected Source File Names dialog box 203 Set Comment Mark dialog box 205 Print dialog box 206 Font dialog box Print 209 Set Header Footer dialog box 211 Grouping by Keyword dialog box 214 Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box 217 Find String dialog box 220 Replace String dialog box 224 Jump to Specified Line dialog box 229 Jump to Specified Line in the Sou
21. Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 177 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Range selection When handling a range selection in the Edit window you must observe the following range selection rules A range can be selected by dragging using the SHIFT arrow key or by using SHIFT click With a single line a range can be selected in units of characters character strings range selection With multiple lines a range can be selected between the beginning and end of each line lines range selection If multiple lines with a layer are selected as a range any lower layers are automatically included in the range When you select multiple lines toward the beginning of file if a layer higher than that of the range selection start line appears the range selection cannot be performed any further When you select multiple lines toward the end of file if a layer higher than that of the range selection start line appears the range selection cannot be performed any further When you select multiple lines toward the beginning of file if you select a line with a expanded lower layer the lower layer is incuded in the range When you select multiple lines toward the end of file if you select a line with a expanded lower layer the lower layer is incuded in the range When you select a range using SHIFT click if you cannot select the range up to the click position the range up to the last line where range selection is possible is selected a
22. 152 Adding a project related file 110 Adding a source file 110 Adding other files 110 CVS Commit 109 152 CVS Diff 110 152 CVS Log 109 152 CVS Status 109 152 CVS Update 109 152 Direct Select Active Project 110 152 Export Makefile 110 152 Insert Project 109 152 Project Settings 110 152 Select Active Project 90 152 Project group 24 Project Group Name dialog box 268 Project Information dialog box 59 Project Management 90 Project manager 23 Project menu 152 Project Settings 110 152 Project Settings dialog box 259 Project Title dialog box 269 Project Window 88 151 Project window 164 Drag and drop function 173 Explanation of each area 165 Files tab 165 Functionname 168 Include Files folder 169 Memo tab 172 Opening 164 Other Files folder 171 Project group name 165 Project Related Files folder 170 Project title name 166 Source Files folder 167 Project related file 46 98 Promote 83 149 Properties dialog box 274 Q Quantitative Limit List 420 Quick tour 32 R Range selection 178 Rebuild 113 153 Rebuild and Debug 112 153 Recent File 142 Recent Workspace 142 Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Oper ations 118 156 Redo 66 143 Register External Tool dialog box 316 Register Ex tool 116
23. If this button is selected comparison starts from the caret position User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 321 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Upward Compares files in the upward direction This dialog box becomes mini version after the com parison If a difference in file contents is found the caret moves to the line including the difference Note that when the Top line button is checked this button is dimmed Downward Compares files in the downward direction This dialog box becomes mini version after the comparison If a difference in file contents is found the caret moves to the line including the difference Details Opens the normal File Compare dialog box only mini version Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Opens the help for this dialog box 322 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE PM plus Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to make various environment settings The environment settings are performed on the following tabs a b C Workspace tab External Editor tab File tab d Recent tab Source File by idl File tab f Window tab g Path tab h Edit tab View tab e J k Scroll tab l Find Replace tab j Layer tab Figure 6 80 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 323 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This section describes t
24. Madrid Spain Seoul Branch Tel 091 504 27 87 Seoul Korea Tel 02 558 3737 e Succursale Francaise Velizy Villacoublay France NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd Tel 01 30 67 58 00 Shanghai P R China _ Tel 021 5888 5400 e Filiale Italiana ek i 41 NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd eee Taipei Taiwan e Branch The Netherlands FON MEU eae Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel 040 244 58 45 NEC Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd Novena Square Singapore e Tyskland Filial Tel 6253 8311 Taeby Sweden Tel 08 63 80 820 e United Kingdom Branch Milton Keynes UK Tel 01908 691 133 J04 1 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM MEMO 6 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM PREFACE Readers The PM plus is an integrated development environment platform that enables efficient controls of programs running in Windows This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to develop application systems using the PM plus on Windows Purpose This manual explains how to operate PM plus on Windows For the Windows operations refer to the function guides provided with the Windows OS Organization This manual consists of the following contents e GENERAL e INSTALLATION e STARTING AND EXITING e QUICK TOUR e METHOD OF OPERATION e WINDOW REFERENCE e MESSAGES How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have a general knowledge of microcomputers and a basic knowledge of how to operate Windows98 WindowsMe Windows2000 Windo
25. New Select the File menu gt Open and specify the file to be open Double click a icon of the file on the Project window 176 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Character input When editing files in the Edit window you must observe the following character input rules If the Enter key is used a new line is inserted following the current line If at this time the current line does not have any lower layer or if the lower layer has been collapsed the new line will have the same layer as the current line If the current line has a lower layer and the layer is expanded the new line will have the lower layer When you are selecting a range or moving lines by dragging character input is ignored Selecting a line range and then pressing the TAB key causes a Tab code to be inserted at the beginning of the selected lines At this time the Tab code is also inserted at the lines of layer which has been collapsed Selecting a line range and then pressing the SHIFT TAB key combination causes the Tab code at the beginning of the selected lines to be deleted At this time the Tab code at the lines of layer which has been collapsed is also deleted Definitions of words When handling a word in the Edit window the definitions of words are as follows Consecutive single byte alohanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding tabs and spaces
26. Replace Tab The layer indent is replaced by a Tab and the source file is saved Replace Space The layer indent is replaced by a one byte space and the source file is saved Not Replace Layer A layer indent is not used for a layer higher than the one specified 4 Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File If this check box is checked Tab characters and two byte spaces are replaced by one byte spaces when the source file is saved 5 Function buttons Button Function OK Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 333 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE f Window tab This tab is used to make settings related to windows Figure 6 86 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Window Tab PH plus Settings 1 Window Size This area is used to select the size of the Edit window Maximize Opens the Edit window in its maximum size Default of PM plus Opens the Edit window in the size of the PM plus screen which is not its maximum size Default of Windows Opens the Edit window in cascade to show each caption default However the Edit window opens in the default size selected when the Project window or Output window is displayed Previous Size Only files recorded in the file history information are opened in the size they were when closed previously Files not saved in the file history inform
27. Step 4 8 dialog box 48 New Workspace Step 5 8 dialog box 50 New Workspace Step 6 8 dialog box 53 New Workspace Step 7 8 dialog box 55 New Workspace Step 8 8 dialog box 56 80 147 Next Tag Jump Upward Next Tag Jump 80 147 O Object 145 One Character Left One Character Right One Line Down 82 148 81 148 81 148 81 148 81 148 80 148 One Line Up One Word Left One Word Right 38 141 Open dialog box 187 Open Open window information 157 57 141 Open Workspace dialog box 193 Open Workspace Operating environments 27 Related development tools 27 DLL 27 Host machine 27 Option bar 88 151 161 Output Window 88 151 Output window 185 Drag and drop function 186 Opening 185 Operations performed with the right mouse button 186 Tag Jump function 185 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 425 Overview 23 P Paste 68 143 Paste Special 68 143 Play Back 118 156 Play Back the Macro File 128 156 Play back the Macro File dialog box 366 Play Back the Register Macro 128 156 PM 23 PM plus 23 PM plus Help 131 158 PM plus Settings 117 156 PM plus Settings dialog box 323 Print 65 142 Print dialog box 206 Print Direct 65 142 Print Preview 64 142 Project 24 90 152 Add New Project 152 Add Other Files 152 Add Project Related Files 152 Add Source Files
28. When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top of the top line When this check box is not checked if range selection has been performed the range from the position where range selection started to the top line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the top line the range up to the line immediately before the line with that higher layer is re selected 5 3 13 Moving the caret to the end of file Selecting the Find menu gt To the End of File moves the caret to the end of the last line of a file When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the end of the last line When this check box is not checked if range selection has been performed the range from the position where range selection started to the last line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the last line the range immediately before that higher layer line is re selected 5 3 14 Moving the caret to the index line Selecting the Find m
29. Yes Display the Save As dialog box No Close the window without saving Cancel Return to the window without doing anything Q2006 The file s already exists Do you wish to rename to this file name The file already exists s indicates the source file name Yes Rename the source file The existing file will be deleted The existing file will be deleted No Do not change the name of the file 404 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2007 The file s is read only Do you wish to rename to this file name The name of source file that was attempted to be changed in the Change Source File Names dialog box is the same as an existing file name Also the file was read only s indicates the source file name Yes Rename the source file The existing file will be deleted The existing file will be deleted No Do not change the name of the file Q2008 Another process has changed s Do you wish to load it The source file was changed by another editor after saving the IDL file s indicates the file name Yes Read the updated source file No Read the IDL file without reading the source file Apply to all update files Read all the files that are updated without an update message if this check box is checked Q2009 Do you wish to close all windows This is to check whether all the windows are to be closed on when a workspace or project file is closed Yes Close all the windows No
30. c Save as type This area displays the type extension of the file to be saved Only Macro File imc is available Function buttons Saves the file with the specified name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 363 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Load the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read a saved macro file Figure 6 104 Load the Macro File Dialog Box Load the Macro File E Program Files NEC tool Macro a _ gt Look ir Ey Macro de Linc al cf I _ _ aea _ gt Files of type Macro Filet ime Cancel Help ze This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File Explanation of each area a Lookin This area displays the folder that includes the macro file to be read The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM plus was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab b File name and Files of type Specif
31. lt mark number gt Specifies number of mark beginning with 1 in display order of Mark Jump dialog box To the Specific Line jump lt line number gt lt line number gt Specify line number appearing on top of file as first line excluding collapsed layers To the Top of File topline To the Index Line indexline To the End of File bottomline Tag Jump tagjump Next Tag Jump nexttagjump Next Tag Jump Upward upwardnexttag One Word Right rightword One Word Left leftword To the Matching Brace jumpparent To the Tag File backtagjump To the Function Definition fuctiondefinition To the Top Layer at caret toplayer One Line Up up line count line count Specify the number of lines to be jumped default is 1 One Line Down down line count line count Specify the number of lines to be jumped default is 1 One Character Left up character count character count Specify the number of characters to be jumped default is 1 One Character Right right character count character count Specify the number of characters to be jumped default is 1 Some Layer Line Up upsamelayer Same Layer Line Down downsamelayer Back Jump backjump Table 5 7 Command Format for Key Board Macro Help menu Contents Command Format External HELP 1 externalhelp1 External HELP 2 externalhelp2 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 123 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION External HELP 3 externalhelp3 Table 5 8 Command Format f
32. or exists on the line from which a jump is to be per formed PM plus searches for the character string in the jump destination line and the character string is selected with range selection If multiple occurrences of the character string are found the first occurrence is selected with range selection If the jump destination file has already been opened in an Edit window and range selection has been performed in the window the selected range will be released when a jump is performed When a tag jump is performed if the IDL file from which the source file was created cannot be found a message is displayed Clicking lt OK gt button in the message dialog box opens the Select IDL File dialog box so that the IDL file or source file to be opened can be selected User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 19 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 25 Returning from a tag jump After a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt To the Tag File returns from the tag jump destina tion to the window from which the tag jump was performed If the corresponding line in the window from which the tag jump was performed cannot be found a jump is performed to the top line of the window from which the tag jump was per formed 5 3 26 Continuing a tag jump downward Once a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt Next Tag Jump continues the search for the line in tag jump format in the window from which the tag jump h
33. 155 Register mode 48 100 Register the Macro Files 128 156 Regular expression 222 225 Release Build 301 303 Replace 73 146 Replace in Files 77 147 Replace in Files dialog box 240 Replace String dialog box 224 Restore Color of Grouping Lines 71 144 S Sample link directive file 413 Save 63 141 Save All 63 142 Save All Source Files 64 142 Save and Close All 64 142 Save As 63 141 Save As dialog box 195 Save Source Files Options dialog box 197 Save the Function List dialog box 254 426 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Save the Key Operation dialog box 362 Save the Key Operations 118 156 Save Workspace 62 141 Search Functions 72 Search result display window 183 Drag and drop function 184 Explanation of each area 183 Opening 183 Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button 183 90 152 Select Active Project dialog box 258 Select All 70 144 Select Build Mode 114 153 Select External Tool dialog box 318 Select Active Project Select Project dialog box 297 Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box 217 Select to the End of Line 70 144 Select to the End of Word 70 144 Select to the Top of Line 70 144 Select to the Top of Word 70 144 Select to the Word 70 144 Set Comment Mark dialog box 205 Set Header Footer dialog box 211 Set Layer Rule dialog
34. 364 Mark Jump 233 New Workspace Step 1 8 43 New Workspace Step 2 8 45 New Workspace Step 3 8 46 New Workspace Step 4 8 48 New Workspace Step 5 8 50 New Workspace Step 6 8 53 New Workspace Step 7 8 55 New Workspace Step 8 8 56 Open 187 Open Workspace 193 Play Back the Macro File 366 PM plus Settings 323 Print 206 Project Group Name 268 Project Information 59 422 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Project Settings 259 Project Title 269 Properties 274 Register External Tool 316 Replace in Files 240 Replace String 224 Save As 195 Save Source Files Option 197 Save the Function List 254 Save the Key Operation 362 Select Active Project 258 Select External Tool 318 Select the way of Function Prototypes 217 Set Comment Mark 205 Set Header Footer 211 Set Layer Rule 248 Shortcut List 378 Source Files 61 Startup File 277 Startup File to register 281 User Setting 346 Window List 376 Direct Build Mode Selection 154 Direct Search 82 148 Direct Select Active Project 110 152 Display All Object as Content 89 151 Display All Object as Icon 89 151 Display Content Icon 151 Display Functions 88 Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon 89 DLL 27 Download Some Load Module Files dump 850 dialog box 374 dump850 116 155 114 153 E
35. Caution If after a function name has been changed in the Edit window and the function name is updated in the Project window the Edit window change status is undone using the Undo Redo menu items the function name is not updated even if the Project window is made active It is updated when build or save is performed Include Files folder Include files registered in the project are grouped here Source files that have a dependency relationship with include files are also displayed Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor When the mouse cursor is placed on the include file folder Include Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the file name the file name indicated by the mouse cursor Is displayed as a full path iN a pop up menu Clicking the right mouse button on the include file folder the file name or displays the following menus When a Include Files folder is selected Update Dependencies Updates a dependency relationship between source files and include files and reflects the updated contents in the Project win dow Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 169 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When a include file name is selected Update Dependencies Updates a dependency relationship between source files a
36. Explanation of each area a 212 Header Header Position Draw a Line Below Header Draw a Filename and Path Draw a Source Filename and Path Font Size CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the contents to be printed as headers by clicking any of the following buttons When a button is clicked the corresponding char acters are entered in the text box Page number p Date d Time t File name f Source file name s ot E5 Specify the position at which the contents of the header Draws a line below the contents of headers Prints a file name with the path name if the file name is printed in the header Prints a source file name with the path name if the source file name is printed in the header Displays the font type under currently set Displays the font size under currently set User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Footer Footer Specify the contents to be printed as footers by clicking any of the following buttons When a button is clicked the corresponding char acters are entered in the text box Page number p ae Date d kel Time t File name f E Source file name s S s Position Specify the position at which the contents of the footer Draw a Line Below Footer Draws a line above the contents of footers Draw a Filename and Path Prints a file name with the path name if the file
37. Figure 6 92 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Find Replace Tab PH plus Settings Workspace l External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File window Path Edt View Layer Scroll Find Replace T Memorize Find What in idl File M Show String vou Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find what 1 Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With Delete the Top of Underscore _ Character when Show Sting Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With a From Top of Structure Member to Member of Caret Position when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What A eplace With I Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding 2 warming for Find Replace M Beep Sound IY Display Messages Cancel Help 1 Way of search replacement Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line If this check box is checked a message is displayed when the downward search finishes at the final line or the upward search finishes at the first line default If the ENTER key or the key displayed on the message is clicked the search goes on If it is not checked the search finishes at the final or the first line Memorize Find What in idl File If this box is checked the character strings last 10 or file names last 10 searched in the Find String dialog box Replace String dialog box or Find in Files dialog box are saved in an IDL file and are valid the next time the IDL file is opene
38. If a project is not opened it searches for the definition line within all the files open in the active Edit window 5 3 20 Searching for matching braces Selecting the Find menu gt To the Matching Brace searches for the matching brace that at the caret position and moves the caret to that brace PM plus can search for the following three types of braces and If no matching brace can be found the caret position does not move Any braces in comments are ignored If range selection has been performed the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Example k Sub title bitlhdeaL NotUpdate TRUE niWork for psc Work 0 pscWord NULL amp amp nWork lt BORDCHAIN NUM if psc Work gt szWordList 0 I HULL The matching brace No 1 The matching brace No 3 The matching brace No 2 The caret position is alternately moved to the matching brace by the input of the CTRL L key combination gt Sub title bithdeal NotUpdate TRUE nWork 0 for nscWork 0 pseWord NULL amp amp nWork lt BORDCHAIN NUM if osc Work gt szWordList 0 NULL The matching brace No 2 The matching brace No 3 The matching brace No 1 5 3 21 Searching for a character string within multiple files Selecting the Find menu gt Find in Files opens
39. JE NECT ools32 BIN SMB5032 EXE Option Debug Target Debug Target File aout T Execute Symbol Reset after Download o M Execute CPU Reset after Download Debug Options Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Debug Target File List CIC ODO testa out Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 313 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Select Debugger 1 Debugger The debugger to be used is selected here If a debugger is newly selected the debugger type set in the project opened previously is displayed by default 2 File Name The path for the selected debugger is displayed here A path for another debugger can also be entered directly In this case if this dialog box is opened after being closed by the OK button User selected debugger is displayed on the Debugger combo box 3 Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger Nothing will be displayed in the default condition b Debugger Target 1 Debug Target File The file to be downloaded to debugger is selected here The load module file names and HEX file names output from the language product are displayed on the drop down list 2 Execute Symbol Reset after Download Checking this check bo
40. Leave all the windows open Q2010 s The workspace file already exists Do you wish to rename old file to s bak and replace it The workspace file name that was specified in the dialog box to create a new workspace file is the same as an existing file name s indicates the specified file name Yes Overwrite the workspace file and save the existing file with the extension bak No Return to the window without doing anything Q2011 s This folder cannot be found Do you wish to create it The specified folder does not exist s indicates the specified folder name Yes Create the folder No Do not create the folder Q2100 Specified to delete in the after grouping Delete the lines and clear the undo buffer if you select Yes Don t delete if you select No When grouping by keyword an operation to delete after grouping was specified Yes Delete the grouped lines from the Edit window of the original search document No Group the lines without deleting Q2101 There were the read only source file s line in the deleting lines Do you wish to delete it A Read Only source file is included in the range to be deleted Yes Delete the lines that contain a read only source file also No Do not delete User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 405 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2102 Do you wish to update the function prototypes The previous prototypes will be deleted as update An attempt was made to create a prototype de
41. Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window Multiple files can be dropped 186 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified file Multiple files being edited can be opened in a read only attribute When closing files if there are multiple files opened in the read only status whose names are the same all of these files are closed Figure 6 11 Open Dialog Box Open Ei ES gt Look in E veS test Tl ce EJ b On Files of type Source Files c 3 Cancel C _ __ gt Open as read only Help dd ppl Layer Rule Layer Rule e Gather Files into an Edit Window This section describes the following items O
42. Output and Search result display windows in total Close the other windows and try again FO202 This file is too large size Please divide this file An attempt was made to edit more than the maximum number of lines 2 097 152 on the Edit window Divide the file being edited using the copy or paste function FO203 Cannot input more More than 5119 characters were entered in a line Decrease the number of the characters per line and enter again F0210 This file has been used by another process Please terminate using application A file currently being edited by another application was edited on PM plus However this message only functions if the application using the same file is an application that has exclusive file access control such as Word Close the application using this file F0211 Failed to create Object A new object could not be created Verify that the specified object is installed correctly User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 387 388 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0212 Failed to copy clipboard Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application The object could not be copied to the clipboard because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0213 Failed to paste from clipboard Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application Object could not be pasted from the clipboard because the memory was insufficient or
43. To the Previous Window menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 9 8 Displaying a list of windows Selecting the Window menu gt Window List opens the Window List dialog box to display a list of currently open win dows 130 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 10 Help Functions 5 10 1 Starting up the PM plus help Selecting the Help menu gt PM plus Help starts up the PM plus help 5 10 2 Displaying the help of the Main window Selecting the Help menu gt Main Window displays the help topic of the Main window 5 10 3 Displaying the help of a current window Selecting the Help menu gt Current Window displays the help topic of the current active window 5 10 4 Displaying a list of shortcut keys Selecting the Help menu gt Shortcut List opens Shortcut List dialog box to list the shortcut keys specified for the PM plus menu items 5 10 5 Accessing to NEC Electronics microprocessor web site Selecting the Help menu gt NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web accesses the NEC Electronics microprocessor web site http www necel com micro index_e html 5 10 6 Starting up a external help 1 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 1 starts up the help specified with External HELP 1 Shift F1 area on the Tool menu gt PM
44. the editing opera tions performed in one part of the window are reflected in the other To split a window use either of the following After selecting the Window menu gt Split specify the split position with mouse When the mouse cursor is positioned to the mark on the top of the Edit window the split enabling cursor is displayed and specify the split position by it To return a split window to the previous state use either of the following Move the split line toward the top or bottom of the window with mouse Double click the left mouse button on the split line 5 9 5 Moving the caret to the other split window Selecting the Window menu gt To the Next Split Window moves the caret from the split window to the other split win dow 5 9 6 Activating the next window Selecting the Window menu gt To the Next Window activating the window following the currently active one accord ing to Z order window superposition order Note that To the Next Window menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 129 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 9 7 Activating the previous window Selecting the Window menu gt To the Previous Window activating the window preceding the currently active one according to Z order window superposition order Note that
45. 17 Figure No 1 1 1 2 3 1 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 9 19 9 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 LIST OF FIGURES Title and Page Main Window 24 Relationship between Software for Program Development and PM plus Main Window 31 Operation Flow until Debugging 32 26 Setting Options Related to Compilation 34 Selecting Active Project 35 36 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Selecting Debugger 40 New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information Dialog Box 43 New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box 45 46 New Workspace Step 4 8 Register Mode Dialog Box New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File Dialog Box 48 New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File Dialog Box 50 New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files Dialog Box 53 New Workspace Step 7 8 Select Debugger Dialog Box 55 New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation Dialog Box 56 Project Information Dialog Box 59 61 History of Replace in files Window 78 Source File Dialog Box 77 Search result display Window Promoting Layers 83 83 Expanding One of the Lower Layers Demoting Layer 84 Collapsing One of the Lower Layers 84 85 The Wizard Flow of Add New Project Dialog Boxes Expanding All of the Lower Layers 92 Ad
46. 327 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Recent Tab 330 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Source File by idl File Tab 332 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Window Tab 334 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Path Tab 335 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Edit Tab 337 PM plus Settings Dialog Box View Tab 339 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Layer Tab 341 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Scroll Tab 343 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 6 92 6 93 6 94 6 95 6 96 6 97 6 98 6 99 6 100 6 101 6 102 6 103 6 104 6 105 6 106 6 107 6 108 6 109 6 110 6 111 6 112 7 1 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Find Replace Tab 344 User Setting Dialog Box 346 Font Dialog Box 348 Customize Dialog Box 350 Customize Dialog Box Keyboard Tab 351 Customize Dialog Box Menu Tab 352 Customize Dialog Box Toolbar Tab 353 Customize Dialog Box User Menu Tab 355 Customize Dialog Box Keyword Tab 356 Edit User keyword Dialog Box 358 Edit C Language s reserve words Dialog Box 360 Save the Key Operation Dialog Box 362 Load the Macro File Dialog Box 364 Play back the Macro File Dialog Box 366 Entry Macro Files Dialog Box 368 Add the Macro file Dialog Box 370 Change the Macro file Dialog Box 372 dump850 Dialog Box 374 Window List Dialog Box 376 Shortcut List Dialog Box 378 About PM plus Dialog Box 380 Message Dialog Box 382 Us
47. 5 8 Link Directive File Step 6 8 Setup Source Files No Specification of V850 series and non library Yes Step 7 8 Select Debugger Step 8 8 Confirmation 40 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The configuration of a typical dialog box is described below New WorkSpace Step 178 Workspace Information System pr CABO test YaSp Yoo Seres uPD 703102 a Setting items The items to be set are displayed in this area b Function description and cautions The function of the dialog box and applicable cautions are described in this area This area is not displayed in the New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box c Current position of wizard flow The whole flow of the wizard is displayed in this area i gt gt i mark signifies the position of the current dialog box If the flow changes according to the selection of information the steps to be skipped are displayed in gray User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 41 d 42 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Function buttons Button Function lt Back Returns to the previous wizard step This button is always disabled in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Next gt Opens the next step dialog box The next step dialog box to be opened differs depending on the selection This button appears as Finish button in the New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box Term
48. 6 82 6 83 6 84 6 85 6 86 6 87 6 88 6 89 6 90 6 91 20 Project Group Name Dialog Box 268 Project Title Dialog Box 269 Add Project Related Files Dialog Box 270 Add Other Files Dialog Box 272 Properties Dialog Box 274 Add New Memo Dialog Box 276 Startup File Dialog Box 277 Copy Startup File from Dialog Box 279 Startup File to register Dialog Box 281 Link Directive File Dialog Box 283 Copy Link Directive File from Dialog Box 285 Link Directive File to register Dialog Box 287 CVS Update Dialog Box 289 CVS Commit Dialog Box 291 CVS Log Dialog Box 293 CVS Status Dialog Box 295 Select Project Dialog Box 297 Batch Build Dialog Box 299 Build Mode Dialog Box 301 Add Build Mode Dialog Box 303 Build Settings Dialog Box 305 Build Settings Dialog Box Build Tab 306 Build Settings Dialog Box Pre Build Process Tab 307 Build Settings Dialog Box After Build Process Tab 308 Add Command Dialog Box 310 Edit Command Dialog Box 311 Debugger Settings Dialog Box 313 Register External Tool Dialog Box 316 Select External Tool Dialog Box 318 File Compare Dialog Box 320 File Compare Dialog Box Mini 320 PM plus Settings Dialog Box 323 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Workspace Tab 324 PM plus Settings Dialog Box External Editor Tab 325 PM plus Settings Dialog Box File Tab
49. Box Project Group Name a 2Olld Project Group Yo50 Cancel b Hew Project Group VES test Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Edit Project Group Name with a project group name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Old Project Group The name of the project group currently selected in the Project window is displayed b New Project Group Specify the newly set project group name directly in this area Up to 260 characters can be entered Function buttons Button Function Changes to the specified project group name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 268 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Title dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project title Figure 6 50 Project Title Dialog Box Project Title a Old Project Title B50 Cancel 0 New Project Title main Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Edit Project Title with a project title selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Old Project Title The name of the project title currently selected i
50. External HELP 1 to External HELP 3 are fixed The Del key is assigned to the Edit menu gt Delete The assignment of the Del key cannot be changed However keys other keys than the DEL key can also be assigned If the Edit menu Object command is allocated to a shortcut key the shortcut key allocated to the Object menu item is not displayed 5 Function buttons Assign Assigns the entered key to the selected menu item If the input shortcut key has already been assigned to another menu item the assignment to the menu is cleared Deletes the shortcut key assigned to the selected menu item b Menu tab This tab sets the options for menus Figure 6 97 Customize Dialog Box Menu Tab 3 Keyboard Menu Toolbar User Menu keyword wiew benu Open Inzert file Oper nzert file Glose New Workspace Ea Open Workspace Hew Workspace nave Workspace Open Workspace Close Workspace nave Workspace Close Workspace 352 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to be added from the drop down list 2 Menu List This area lists menu items that can be included in the menu selected in Menu Select a menu item to be set 3 View Menu This area displays the menu items currently specified for the menu selected in
51. Find in Files dialog box to search for a character string within multi ple files in a specified folder 76 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 22 Replacing a character string within multiple files Selecting the Find menu gt Replace in Files opens Replace in Files dialog box to replace a character string within multiple files in a specified folder When Replace in Files is executed the History of Replace in files window is opened to show the file history message of the replacement in files The message begins with the search key replacement character string file type and searched folder The body of the history contains the name of the searched files number of the lines for which the replacement was performed source file names where applicable and the contents of the lines before the replacement Figure 5 12 History of Replace in files Window BF History of Replace in files Untitled Find string gt Main Replace string Maint Displays the search conditions File type Hct Folder E ob0 test E F 2 ENYA test testl c was finished to search w CPLICTES 1 0 void maintvoid The using file E 850 test testi c was replaced Replaced 1 Found 1 EDS Woo0 test test c was finished to search t gt The search string was not found into the using file E eb0 test test ic t CTICTEST2 0 Test id 7 k CTICTEST2 0 fs Test idl 4 The sear
52. Menu 4 Function buttons c Toolbar tab This tab sets the options for the toolbar Figure 6 98 Customize Dialog Box Toolbar Tab Customize keyboard Menu Toolbar User Menu keyword Toolbar 3 Etandard Bar Reset f Buttons 4 Add gt Ez Hew Workspace Remove 7 Open Workspace IIE UW 4 Print Preview 5 Separator Down separator Cancel Help User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 353 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to be set from the drop down list 2 Menu List This area lists the buttons and menu items included in the menu selected from Menu Select a button to be added 3 Toolbar This area is used to select the toolbar to be customized The standard bar and build bar can be customized 4 Buttons This area displays the buttons and menu items currently specified for the toolbar selected in Toolbar 5 Function buttons Function Inserts the menu item selected in Menu List at the position selected in Buttons fo Enso peatevtons dessa Moves the menu item selected in Buttons up K O C 354 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d User Menu tab This tab is used to set the menu displayed by the right mouse button or by the assigned shortcut key Figure 6 99 Customize Dialog Box User Menu Tab
53. New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box The link directive file is created under the name project file name dir and registered to the project related files automatically The link directive file that is created is registered to the project related files automatically The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Refer to APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE for the contents of the link directive file to be created 102 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Caution The link directive file that is created must be customized in accordance with the target specification or user defined sections In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is used select this radio button If Brows button is clicked the Link Directive File dialog box is
54. PROGBITS 7AW Si data S DSS NOBITS TAW sibss Ja POOLO I LOAD RW VOxffel00 pool 0 NOBITS AW pool 0 iz __tp_TEXT TP_SYMBOL gp DATA GP_SYMBOL DATA ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 417 When Use RX850 Pro and Use Internal memory onl Sample link directive file use rx850pro use internal copyright SCONST SYSTEM 3 SI DATA tidata byte tibss byte tidata word tibss word tidata tibss Si data S DSS DATA a LOAD R sconst LOAD R sit PEOAD SER 4 const I LOAD RX System system cmn system int I LOAD RX pro epi _runti me eUEXt and other APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE notices PROGBI TS PROGBI TS PROGBI TS PROGBI TS PROGBI TS PROGBI TS PROGBITS PROGBI TS LOAD RW VOxffed00 PROGBI TS NOBI TS PROGBI TS NOBI TS PROGBI TS NOBI TS PROGBI TS NOBI TS I LOAD RW VOxffel00 data Sdata SDSS Dss __tp_TEXT TP_SYMBOL gp DATA GP_SYMBOL DATA ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution 418 PROGBI TS PROGBI TS NOBI TS NOBI TS User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 7A 7A TAS AX system ZAX System_cmn TAX system int sconst Sit const are selected memory only AX pro_epi_ runtime AX
55. Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options Caution In the environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now button is selected automatically and other items become invalid 5 The Startup File Name to register Specify the name of the startup file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Caution If after selecting Do Not specify now for the startup file and registering the source file in the Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box and then returning to this dialog box and specifying the source file registered in the Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box as the startup file and ending the wizard as is the fol lowing linker option setting message is displayed and the startup file is registered to both the source file and project related files Startup file specification is illegal Delete the startup file registered to the source file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 99 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 4 8 Regi
56. SDSS NOBITS 7AWG sbss bss NOBITS TAW bss ie POOLI LOAD RW pool 1 NOBITS AW pool 1 ie POOL0 eh OAD RW pool 0 NOBITS 7AW pool 0 ie __tp TEXT TP_SYMBOL __gp_DATA GP_SYMBOL DATA __ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 416 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Use RX850 and Use External memory are selected Sample link directive file use rx850 use external memory copyright and other notices ST I LOAD RX Sit PROGBI TS 7AX sit ie SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBITS 7A Sconst i TEXT I LOAD RX pro_epi_ runtime PROGBITS AX pro_epi_runti me text PROGBITS 7AX text DATA I LOAD RW V0x100000 data PROGBI TS 7AW data sdata PROGBITS AWG sdata SDSS NOBITS 7AWG sbss DSS NOBITS TAW bSS P POOLI I LOAD RW pool 1 NOBITS AW pool 1 Js CONST I LOAD R const PROGBITS A const ie SEDATA LOAD RW VOxff6000 sedata PROGBITS TAW sedata sebss NOBITS TAW sebss ie SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidata byte PROGBITS 7AW tidata byte tibss byte NOBITS ZAW tibss byte tidata word PROGBI TS 7AW tidata word tibss word NOBI TS TAW tibss word tidata PROGBI TS 7AW tidata tibss NOBI TS TAW tibss sidata
57. Set Comment Mark Dialog Box 205 Print Dialog Box 206 Font Dialog Box Print 209 Set Header Footer Dialog Box 211 Grouping by Keyword Dialog Box 214 Select the way of Function Prototypes Dialog Box 217 Find String Dialog Box 220 Find String Dialog Box Mini 221 Replace String Dialog Box 224 Replace String Dialog Box Mini 227 Jump to Specified Line Dialog Box 229 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file Dialog Box 231 Mark Jump Dialog Box 233 Find in Files Dialog Box 235 Find in Files Dialog Box Details 235 select Folder Dialog Box 236 Replace in Files Dialog Box 240 Replace in Files Dialog Box during Replacement 240 Expand to Specified Layer Dialog Box 245 Collapse to Specified Layer Dialog Box 247 Set Layer Rule Dialog Box 248 Function List Dialog Box 251 save the Function List Dialog Box 254 Layer List Dialog Box 256 Select Active Project Dialog Box 258 Project Settings Dialog Box 259 Project Settings Dialog Box Project Information Tab 260 Project Settings Dialog Box Source File Tab 262 Insert Project Dialog Box 264 Add Source Files Dialog Box 266 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 174 19 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 60 6 61 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 6 71 6 72 6 73 6 74 6 75 6 76 6 77 6 78 6 79 6 80 6 81
58. This dialog box is used to collapse specified layers This dialog box is used to apply a layer rule to the current con tents of the Edit window or set the layer rule to be applied when files are read This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destina tion line number in a specified source file Set Layer Rule dialog box Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to lists the functions of the file dis played in the active Edit window Save the Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to save the functions displayed in the Function List dialog box to a file Project Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the information on the active project Insert Project dialog box This dialog box is used to insert an existing project into a project group Add Source Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add source files to a project Layer List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window Select Active Project dialog box This dialog box is used to select the active project Project Group Name dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project group name Project Title dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project title Add Project Related Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add project related files to a project Add Other Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add any files to a project as other files P
59. Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position rightward by one character Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position leftward by one character Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Make the Search Character String Specification combo box of the toolbar active Searches for the specified character string in the currently active Edit window by pressing Enter key Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Layer menu File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Chrl Shift Lett Arrow Chrl Shitt Aight Arrow Promote Demote E parnantolapse Erpand All ionen leavers etre E spand All Collapse All Expand the Specific Laver Collapse the Specific Laver Collapse This Layer Apple Laver Rule Promote Promotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Demote Demotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned o
60. When Use RX850 and Use External memory are selected When Use RX850 Pro and Use Internal memory only are selected When Use RX850 Pro and Use External memory are selected The sample link directive file that was created in this process is saved in the project folder and registered in a project related file The name of the sample link directive file is project file name dir Caution The following sample files are all for cases when the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 In actual fact a sample link directive file corresponding to the start address of the internal memory of the specified device is created In the space for copyright and other notices the version information of PM plus device name device file name and start and end addresses of the internal RAM area are described as well as the copyright notice The link directive file that was created has to be customized by the user according to the specifications of the target or the user defined sections User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 413 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Not use RTOS and Use Internal memory only are selected Sample link directive file not use RTOS use internal memory only copyright and other notices SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBITS A Sconst bi CONST LOAD R const PROGBITS A const TEXT ILOAD RX pro_epi_ runtime PROGBITS AX pro_ epi runtime EKL PROGBITS VAX
61. Windows Setup Startup Disk Bs To install a new program from a floppy disk or CO ROM drive click Install Install Se Ihe following software can be automatically removed by Windows To remove a program or to modify its installed components select it from the list and click Add Remove NEC CASSO Wore Documents NEC CASO W850 C Compiler W xxx NEC IDSS0 WY xxx Documents NEC D850 W850 Integrated Debugger W xxr NEC PM plus W xxx Documents MEC Phi plus W ww NEC SMSO Wore Documents NEC SM85050 System Simulator W xxx ToolLinkM anager W xxx Add Remove OF Cancel Aly 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog will be displayed Then click the Yes button User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 29 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 4 When PM plus have been deleted the message Uninstall successfully completed is displayed click the OK but ton This completes uninstalling PM plus Remove Programs From Your Computer 30 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND EXITING 3 1 Starting To start PM plus select Programs gt NECTools32 gt PM plus from Windows start menu or double click an exist ing workspace file prw The Main window will be displayed after PM plus is started If PM plus is started from an existing workspace file that workspace file is automatically read Figure 3 1 Main Window eit PH plus No Workspace Projectwindow File Edit Find La
62. Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box if overwriting the workspace file is enabled the original file is left with the extension bak Restore this file F0124 Failed to rename the file name s1 to s2 Aborted to create a new workspace The displayed temporary file could not be renamed as the original file when New Workspace on the File menu was executed s1 indicates the name of the temporary file and s2 indicates the name of the original file When specifying the workspace file name on the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box if overwriting the workspace file is enabled the temporary file is the original file Restore this file F0125 s Failed to create the sample file Make sure that disk space or the same name file exists that is read only or the other process using Failed to create the sample file s indicates the sample file name Free up disk space Check whether or not a file with the same name is read only or being used by another applica tion If the file is read only clear the attribute and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again F0126 Cannot found the data file for creating the sample link directive file Make sure that PM plus has installed correctly When creating a link directive file sample the data file to be used could not be found In the last dialog box of the wizard click the Cancel button close P
63. a read only file s indicates the file name Clear the Read Only attribute with Explorer etc and set the file again E1023 Some files cannot be found Please check the files exist The source and include files registered in the workspace file project file specified to be opened could not be found If this massage is displayed the same contents are also displayed in the Output window Check that all the source and include files registered in the workspace project exist E1024 s Project file cannot be found Make sure that the correct path and filename given The specified project file could not be found s indicates the specified project file name Check that the specified project file exists E1025 s Cannot create the folder The folder name was illegal or a folder without access rights was specified s indicates the specified folder name Specify the correct folder name or specify a folder with access rights E1026 Enter the folder name with absolute path The specified folder name has a relative path Specified the folder name with an absolute path E1027 s Cannot register the filename with space character Please regist the file after rename tt When adding source file a file name with one byte spaces was specified s indicates the specified folder name Rename the file using a file name without one byte spaces and register it again Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 393 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1028 Please spe
64. a workspace to be opened is displayed after the workspace file or the project file is closed When a project file created by PM V3 xx is specified it will be transferred to a workspace file for PM plus and opened Figure 6 13 Open Workspace Dialog Box a Look in 4 W850 test Al ce b Files of type Workspace F ile privy Cancel Help ee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Open Workspace Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 193 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type File name Specify the name of the file to be opened Up to 255 characters can be entered Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above Files of type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are dis played in the default condition Workspace File prw Project File prj All Files Function buttons Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 194 User s M
65. again E1700 s Failed to start up the ex tool Make sure that the correct path and file name given The external tool could not be started up s indicates the full path name for the external tool Check the set path and verify that the external tool exists User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1701 The Ex Editor was not entered An external editor is not set Set an external editor E1702 s Failed to start up DFINST Make sure that the correct path and file name given DFINST could not be started up s indicates the executed full path name Check the set path and verify that DFINST exists E1703 Cannot register only box or separator Please register one or more command buttons An attempt was made to register only combo boxes and partition lines when customizing the standard bar or build bar Register more than one command button and then click the OK button E1704 s Cannot open this file Choose the application that open file The specified file could not be opened s indicates the specified file name Make an association with the application to be started up using Explorer E1705 Cannot open URL you specified Choose the application to open URL The specified URL could not be opened s indicates the specified URL Check if the browser used normally is set E1706 s Cannot start up this application Make sure that the correct path and given The specified application could not be opened s i
66. all windows without saving Selecting the File menu gt Destroy All closes all the Edit window currently open without saving The Output window and the Project window are not closed 5 1 17 Changing a source file name Selecting the File menu gt Change Source File Name opens the Change Source File Names dialog box in which the name of the source file can be changed 5 1 18 Saving all source files Selecting the File menu gt Save All Source Files saves all the source files by overwriting regardless of whether the contents are modified or not 5 1 19 Checking printing status Selecting the File menu gt Print Preview displays the printing status of the active Edit window in the condition set in the Print dialog box The following functions are supported on the print preview window Print Displays the Print dialog box Next Page Displays the next screen Prev Page Displays the previous screen One Page Two Page Toggles the display mode between one page or two page Zoom In Expands the display in two steps Zoom Out Reduces the display in two steps Close Closes the print preview window 64 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 20 Printing Selecting the File menu gt Print opens the Print dialog box to print the contents of the active Edit window 5 1 21 Printing directly Selecting the File menu gt Print Direct prints the contents o
67. and extension Series Name and Device Name Select the item to be created and the device file to be used from the drop down list Clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box Specify whether or not to use NEC Electronics real time OS This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Figure 5 21 Add New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box Add New Project Step 2 6 Select Real Time 05 Please select the Real Time OS RATOS ATOS 1 Project Information 22 Select Real Time O5 1 Not use 3 Startup Filej Aros setings 4 Register Model 5 Link Directive File 6 Setup Source Files r Select Debugger 8 Confirmation H VE50 Seres Only 2 5 Please select the Real Time 05 ATOS from NEC Electronics to be used Only the installed ATOS from NEC Electronics can be selected Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 RTOS When using the NEC Electronics real time OS select the name of real time OS when not using that select Not use from the drop down list All the names of the real time OS for NEC Electronics V850 series that have been
68. anti failure features e NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades Standard Special and Specific The Specific quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer designated quality assurance program for a specific application The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade as indicated below Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots Special Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems life Support systems and medical equipment for life support etc The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to dete
69. box 248 Shortcut List 131 158 Shortcut List dialog box 378 Show Index 1 86 149 Show Index 2 86 149 Show Index 3 86 150 Show Index 4 86 150 Show Index 5 86 150 Same Layer Line Down 75 147 Some Layer Line Up 75 147 Source File dialog box 61 Split 129 157 stack850 116 155 Standard Bar 88 151 Standard bar 159 Start up Ex tool 117 155 Starting 31 Startup file 46 98 Startup File dialog box 277 Startup File to register dialog box 281 Status bar 151 88 162 Stop Build 113 153 T Tag Jump 79 147 Title bar 140 Title Horizontally 129 157 129 157 Toa Specific Line 73 To the End of File 74 147 To the End of Line 73 147 To the Function Definition 76 147 74 147 76 147 129 157 129 157 130 157 Title Vertically To the Index Line To the Matching Brace To the Next Split Window To the Next Window To the Previous Window To the Specific Line 146 To the Specific Line in the Source file To the Tag File 80 147 To the Top Layer at caret To the Top of File 74 147 To the Top of Line 73 147 Tool 155 dump850 155 118 156 116 155 117 155 73 147 74 147 Customize Debugger Settings Device File Installer dump850 116 File Compare Font 117 156 Load the Macro File Play Back 118 156 Play Back the Macro File 117 155 128 156 128 156 Play Back the Register Macro 128 156 117 156 Record
70. box clicking the OK button can be specify the folder If the Cancel button is clicked a folder cannot be selected Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 241 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Replacement options area 1 Look in Subfolders If this button is checked the subfolders of the specified folder are also searched through This setting is linked with the setting made in the Find in Files dialog box 2 Match Whole Word Only If this box is checked a whole word match for the search key is searched for This setting is linked with the set ting made in the Find in Files dialog box 3 Display Message every Source File in the case of IDL file If this box is checked if the replacement target file is an IDL file used to create a source file the name of the source file in which the search key was found is displayed as the message Q2205 Clicking the Yes button performs search replacement for the displayed source file Clicking the No button makes search replacement skip from the displayed source file to the next source file A read only source file line is not replaced in this case the message box will not appear and the search will skip to the next source file 4 Match Case If this box is checked a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default This setting is linked with the setting made in the Find in Files dialog box
71. box the next time the Batch Build dialog box is opened the deleted project build mode item is deleted to the Build Project and Build Order to be built 300 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to select add and delete build modes Figure 6 67 Build Mode Dialog Box Build Mode a Build Mode OK Cancel Debue Build ok _ Cancel Hr Eemere Help Remove This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Build menu gt Select Build Mode Explanation of each area a Build Mode The currently selected build mode is displayed Select the build mode using this combo box as required There are two default build modes Release Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is not output Debug Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is output By default Debug Build is selected User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 301 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Sets the specified build mode The set added or deleted build mode is saved in a project file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Add Opens the Add Build Mode dialog box If a language product that does not support build mode is used this button is invalid Remove Deletes the c
72. build termination batch build batch rebuild stops at that instant Stop the Build on Compile Error If even one error occurs during build building stops when compilation of that source file has finished When this box is not checked even if an error occurs during build building does not stop until compilation of all the target source files has finished Prompt Message Box as Build Finished When build is finished a message box is displayed default If this box is not checked end of build is indicated only by a sound Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Function buttons Button Function K Enables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box b Pre Build Process tab If there is any processing required prior to build conversion processing or backing up of source files this process ing is set here The set items are always executed when build is executed The order of execution is from the top of the list Commands can be specified in the Add Command dialog box by clicking the Add button Figure 6 71 Build Settings Dialog Box Pre Build Process Tab Build Settings EJ Buld Fre Build Process After Build Process Command Add copy d tests libstest lib d test d test init bat l Edt Remove Cancel Help Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 307 CHAPTER 6 WIND
73. can be added into a project by dragging and dropping the appropriate source file onto the Files tab Figure 6 5 Project Window File Tab Project indow OF x Files blema H F Button Control 3 Project s G Servo Control 2 Projectie 1 Sg f man 2 El E test3 c El E test4 c Seo Include Files 5 E Test2 h mA testle l test2 c tests c testd c H E Testt h H E Testa h H E Test4 h Seo Project Related Files 6 crtE o Sy Other Files 7 Specification doc Fl ServoLibrary 1 Project group name Multiple registered projects can be arranged with related projects in a group The project group name can be set by the user freely and up to 260 characters names can be set However only up to 259 characters can be displayed in the Project window The initial setting for the project group name is made when a workspace is created Up to 20 projects can be registered in one project group Register the same device file for multiple registered projects as they are managed as a project group When the mouse cursor is placed on the project group name the device name used in the projects affiliated with that project group is displayed as a pop up menu User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 165 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clicking the right mouse button on the project group name displays the following menus Edit Project Group Name Add New Project Insert Project Register order A
74. causes the line and the lower layer to be copied Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button The operation performed by double clicking the mouse button can be specified as either of the following with the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Expands a collapsed layer or collapses an expanded layer Selects a word range Operations performed with the right mouse button When you click the right mouse button in the Edit window the following menu items are displayed These menu items can be changed with the Tool menu gt Customize Cut Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them Copy Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the caret position Undo Cancels the effect of an edit operation to restore the previous state Redo Cancels the effect of an Undo operation Find Searches for the specified character string Replace Replaces the specified character string with the replacement character string Expand Expands one of the lower layers Collapse Collapses one of the lower layers Promote Promotes the layer of line by one Demote Demotes the layer of line by one Scrolling The operation of scrolling can be specified with the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Scroll tab Also the scroll bars can be toggled between on and off by
75. characters a b or c will appear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly O times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of a To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched 226 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The regular expression indicating that one of the characters en
76. checked a horizontal scroll bar is displayed at the bottom of each Edit window default Vertical Scroll Bar If this check box is checked a vertical scroll bar is displayed at the right side of each Edit window default 3 Indent Tab Characters This area sets the number of characters for a Tab indent 2 4 or 8 characters can be set 4 Title This area is used to select the method to display the title bar on the Edit window Show Filename Only file names are displayed on the title bar in the Edit window Show Filename and Full Path The title bar on the Edit window is displayed with the full path default 5 Put Caret at The Top Line as opened idl File If this check box is checked the caret is displayed at the first line when an IDL file is opened If it is not checked the caret is displayed at the position saved the previous time 6 Memorize number of Tab Characters each Window If this check box is checked the number of Tab character expansions is set for each Edit window If it is not checked the setting is executed for the entire PM plus 7 Color Background Sets the background color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to char acter The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button Character Sets the underline color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to char acter The color can be chang
77. corresponding series name When a debugger is selected from this list the file name of the debugger is displayed in the File Name text box and the selected debugger will start up automatically when a debug operation is executed If you wish to change the debugger to be used after exiting the wizard select the Tool menu gt Debugger Set ting 2 File name The file name of the debugger to be used for debugging is displayed When the debugger is selected by the Debugger drop down list that file name is displayed with the path automatically If you wish to change the path select the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings 3 Option Specify the options for when starting up the debugger User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 107 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box The contents of the setting are confirmed and the wizard for creating a new project is terminated Figure 5 27 Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation Dialog Box Add New Project Step 6 6 Confirmation Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 The display of the settings The information set by this wizard for creating a new project is displayed here If there are no errors in settings click the Finish button to terminate this wizard The workspace and the project file belonging to that workspace will then be created in accordance with the displayed information 108 Users Manual U16934EJ
78. could not be read Search for the cause of the failure and execute again FO120 All project file cannot be read On reading workspace all the files could not be read among the registered project files Search for the cause of the failure and execute again F0121 s Failed to save this workspace file Make sure that disk space or this file has broken or this file using with other application The disk capacity is full or the file is damaged Or the specified file is being used by another application s indi cates the file name Check the disk capacity verify that the file is not damaged and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again F0122 Failed to create the backup file Make sure that the backup file is used by the other process or the disk is full The backup file being created is already being used by another process or the disk capacity is smaller than the vol ume of the file to be written If the backup file is being used by another application close the application Check the disk capacity and execute again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 385 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0123 s Failed to delete temporary file Aborted to create a new workspace The displayed temporary file could not be deleted when New Workspace on the File menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be deleted When specifying the workspace file name on the New
79. dialog box 95 Add New Project Step 2 8 dialog box 97 Add New Project Step 3 8 dialog box 98 Add New Project Step 4 8 dialog box 100 Add New Project Step 5 8 dialog box 102 Add New Project Step 6 8 dialog box 105 Add New Project Step 7 8 dialog box 107 Add New Project Step 8 8 dialog box 108 Add Other Files 272 Add Project Related Files 270 Add Source Files 266 Add the Macro file 370 Batch Build 299 Build Mode 301 Build Settings 305 Change Selected Source File Name 201 Change Selected Source File Names 203 Change Source File Names 199 Change the Macro file 372 Collapse to Specified Layer 247 Copy Link Directive File from 285 Copy Startup File from 279 Customize 350 CVS Commit 291 CVS Log 293 CVS Status 295 CVS Update 289 Debugger Settings 313 dump 850 374 Edit C Language s reserve words 360 Edit Command 311 Edit User keyword 358 Entry Macro Files 368 Expand to Specified Layer 245 File Compare 320 Find in Files 235 Find String 220 Font 348 Font Print 209 Function List 251 Grouping by Keyword 214 Insert File 190 Insert Project 264 Jump to Specified Line 229 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file 231 Layer List 256 Link Directive File 283 Link Directive File to register 287 Load the Macro File
80. enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 255 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Layer List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window Figure 6 42 Layer List Dialog Box a Laver test clE VO50 testy EMKensai a af void ET ALS rod 15 Cancel forinGrt 0 nGnt lt 20 nr ay void Furie Kint nGnt S62 Help E BOOL Func2tvoid 75 Eint FuncstLONG Mor 40 E forfnRet 0 nRet lt 5 nRet elf LL N TI El testa cE VOoO testy E Kensad word Funcdovoide 114 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the View menu gt Layer List Explanation of each area a Layer The list indicates the text and line number with lower layers If the first layer has a file name the file name is dis played as well Clicking displays a list of the layers lower than the line Clicking hides the list Double clicking a layer or clicking the Jump button with a layer selected makes a jump to the selected layer in the Edit window 256 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Jumps to the layer selected in Layer Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog
81. execute again F0219 Too big print font so cannot print any more When printing was executed with a large font after text wrap around line numbers and hierarchy symbols were specified to be printed in the Print dialog box printing was canceled because a linefeed occurred between the line numbers and layer marks and the characters Set a smaller font and try again F0300 s Failed to delete temporary file Aborted to add a new project into workspace The displayed temporary file could not be deleted when the Add New Project command was executed s indi cates the file name that could not be deleted When specifying the project file name on Add New Project if overwriting the project file is enabled the original file is left with the extension bak Restore this file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0301 Failed to rename the file name s1 to s2 Aborted to add a new project into workspace The displayed temporary file could not be renamed as the original file when the Add New Project command was executed s1 indicates the name of the temporary file and s2 indicates the name of the original file When specifying the project file name on Add New Project if overwriting the project file is enabled the tempo rary file is the original file Restore this file F0400 Syntax error Please check the make file There was a syntax error in the make file Check the syntax of the make file and corr
82. expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear 222 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly O times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more
83. file Please execute build command after setting output assembler source of compile option When executing stack850 the s file which is a target analysis file is older than the c file Set the assembler output option of CA850 execute build and try the command again E1714 s The file was not the latest object file Please execute build command and update the object file When executing dump850 the v file which is a target analysis file is older than the source file Execute build update the object and try the command again E1715 Failed to start up the Link Directive Generator Make sure that it was installed correctly The Open with Link Directive Generator menu was selected with the right mouse button on the Project window but link directive generator could not be started up This is displayed when tool DLL for link directive generator is not installed Install the link directive generator and try the command again E1716 Failed to start up the OS settings Make sure that the NEC Electronics OS was installed correctly When creating a new workspace or adding a new project the OS setting button was selected but the OS setting dialog box could not be displayed Check whether the OS product is installed correctly If not install it E1717 The version information not found in the registry Make sure that the NEC Electronics tools with this function installed correctly On displaying version information registry infor
84. file can also be added into the project by dragging and drop ping an appropriate file directly onto the Project window Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Add Source Files dialog box A source file can also be added into the project by dragging and dropping an appropriate file directly onto the Project window Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Deletes a selected source file from the project Compiles a selected file Opens a selected file under the set editor Opens the Compiler Options dialog box When options are set to a file the icon of the file displays in green Cancels compiler options set to a file Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 167 4 168 CHAPTER When an assembler source file is selected Add Source Files Delete Source File Compile Open Special Assembler Options Reset Special Assembler Options Properties 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Add Source Files dialog box A source file can also be added into the project by dragging and dropping an appropria
85. file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped When dropping a workspace file and a file other than the workspace file together Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Opens other files that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 173 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When dropping a project file and a file other than the project file together Creates a project group newly and add a project file Other dropped file is added as a source file to the added project and opened in the Edit window When opening a workspace for which project is registered When opening a workspace for which project is registered is opened the operation differs depending on the location where the file was dropped Figure 6 7 Position where a File is Dropped in a Workspace for which Project is Registered Project indow 0 Files Memo E g Button Control 3 Project s Servo Control 2 Project s E eae E E test3 c E E test4 c H E Include Files H Project Relat
86. file list box this button can not be selected Moves the selected file up within the source file list box Down Moves the selected file down within the source file list box Remove All EE Oo a Q 106 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 7 8 Select Debugger dialog box Select the debugger which debug the project to be created newly The specification of the item marked with in this dialog can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected The debugger specified with this dialog box can be changed after exiting this wizard Figure 5 26 Add New Project Step 7 8 Select Debugger Dialog Box Add Hew Project Step 778 Select Debugger Please select the Debugger Project Information Select Real Time OS H Startup File Register Wlodel Debugger 1 eon EBA Gusto j E m 7 ae File name Link Directive File 2 CANECTools32 BIN SM85032 EXE l Setup Source Files 27 Select Debugger Option 8 Confirmation 3 H VE50 Series Only 2 5 fou can change the selected Debugger using T ool gt Select Debugger Required field Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Debugger Select the debugger to be used from the drop down list All the NEC Electronics debuggers that have been installed are displayed in the drop down list together with the
87. keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 104 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box Specify the name of the source file to be registered into the project It is possible to proceed to the next step by clicking the Next gt button even if no source files are specified in this dialog box In this case source files can be registered into the project by specifying with the Project Settings dialog box or drag ging and dropping the source files to be registered onto the Project window Figure 5 25 Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files Dialog Box Add Hew Project Step 6 6 Setup Source Files Please setup Source Files Project Information Source File Hame Add Select Real Time O5 Startup File Register Model Link Directive File Setup Source Files Remove ti Remove All Select Debugger Up Confirmation Down H V550 Seres Only 2 5 fou can alzo add source files by specitying the list file or the folder fou don t need to specify all the files here and you can setup source files using Project gt Project Settings later lt Back Cancel Help User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 105 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Source File Name The names of the source files to be registered i
88. likely to be unstable restart the machine F0003 Failed to executing the command The DOS command could not be executed Check whether the command can be executed correctly at the DOS prompt and set so that the command can oper ate If this message is displayed prior to build execution create the make file again using Export Makefile from the Project menu and execute build F0004 Make file is broken Make sure that the make file is remade An attempt to execute build failed because the make file was damaged Create the make file again using Export Makefile from the Project menu and execute build FO001 Cannot read the file Make sure that this file has broken An error occurred when the file was read Check if the file is damaged and try again F0101 Cannot save this file This file is used by the other process or specified illegal file name or the disk is full A file already specified by another process is being used for storing source files or the disk capacity is smaller than the volume of the files to be written If the specified file is being used by another application close the application If the disk is full free up memory If the file name is illegal specify it with usable characters F0102 Failed to change make the file name of the source file by IDL file Make sure the IDL file memorized this source file by IDL file A source file generated by an IDL file could not be changed or created when being stored
89. lines cannot be deleted Do Nothing Performs no processing on the collected lines e Match Case Collects lines including a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the char acters in the search key f Restore Color of Grouping Lines Already Collects lines in the original color which was changed by the previous grouping default g Change Color of Grouped Lines Only Collects no lines and instead only changes the color of the lines including the search key specified in Find What If this check box is checked the setting made in After Grouping is disabled By default this check box is not checked User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Grouping to The Top Collects lines including the search key and displays the collected lines at the top of the searched Edit window in the order in which the lines are found Grouping to Other Collects lines including the search key and displays the collected lines at the top of a new Edit window in the order in which the lines are found Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If Grouping to Other is selected the new window is titled Grouping search key UntitledX Changed The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed when the next grouping is performed Collected lines cannot be de
90. linker option setting message is displayed and the startup file is registered to both the source file and project related files Startup file specification is illegal Delete the startup file registered to the source file Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 47 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 4 8 Register Mode dialog box Specify the register mode option for the C compiler The sample file of the startup file corresponding to the register mode which is selected in this dialog box is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box and Copy and Use the Sample file has been specified in the previous wiz ard step New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Figure 5 5 New Workspace Step 4 8 Register Mode Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 4 6 Register Hode Please select the Register Mode 1 Workspace Information 1 Ss 22 Register Mode 2 Select Real Time O5 3 Startup File gt o4 Register Mode 2 f 26 Register Mode 5 Link Directive File 6 Setup Source Files T Select Debugger 3 _ oe 32 Flegister Mode 8 Confirmation H VS50 Series Only 2 5 According as the selected C4850 Register Mode the sample Startup File will be copied and used The Register Mode sets the number of registe
91. menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 13 Deleting a line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete the Line deletes a single line at the caret position If multiple lines are selected with range selection Delete the Line cannot be selected The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard 5 2 14 Deleting character strings to the top of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to the Top of Line deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the begin ning of the line The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard After the portion is deleted the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line Note that Delete to the Top of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 15 Deleting character strings to the end of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to the End of Line deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line The contents of the deleted line is not sent to the clipboard After the portion is deleted the caret position will not be changed Note that Delete to the End of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify i
92. name is printed in the footer Draw a Source Filename and Path Prints a source file name with the path name if the source file name is printed in the footer Font Displays the font type under currently set Size Displays the font type under currently set Function buttons Change Header Font Opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be specified Change Footer Font Opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be specified Enables the specified items Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 213 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Grouping by Keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to collect lines including a specified character string and display the collected results at the top of the Edit window In the collected results the search key is displayed in the first layer and the collected lines are dis played in the second layer The collected lines also remain in their original positions unless Delete is selected in After Grouping Figure 6 23 Grouping by Keyword Dialog Box Find What Grouping to Other Cancel Help W Restore Color of Grouping Lines Already After Grouping i Change Color C Delete C Do Nothing Conditions C AND Search f OR Search e v Mach Case This section describes the following items Opening Explanati
93. of the index line at the current caret position Moves the caret position to the top layer line at the current caret position Moves the caret position to the layer line of the same depth ata position one line above the current caret Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position to the layer line of the same depth at a position one line below the current caret Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position to the position before the previous jump Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position to the definition line for the function Searches for the matching brace that at the current caret position and moves the caret to that brace Searches for the specified character string within multiple files Opens the Find in Files dialog box Replaces the specified character string within multiple files Opens the Replace in Files dialog box Searches for the specified character string within multiple files reg istered in the project Performs a tag jump Returns fr
94. on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Find Replace tab a message confirming whether to continue the search is output once the search to the top line is completed If this check box is not checked it terminates after searching to the top line Note that Find Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 3 Searching for a character string downward Selecting the Find menu gt Find Downward searches for a specified character string in the downward direction toward the end of the text If you have not specified a character string to search for the Find String dialog box will be opened If Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Find Replace tab a message confirming whether to continue the search is output once the search to the end line is completed If this check box is not checked it terminates after searching to the end line Note that Find Downward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 4 Searching for a word upward Selecting the Find menu gt Find the Word Upward searches for the word at the caret position in the upward direction If Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of fur
95. opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If an existing link directive file is used the File Name button cannot be selected Caution In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is copied and used select this radio button Specify the link directive file name to be the copy source and the link directive file name to be the copy destination If Brows button is clicked the Copy Link Directive File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be the copy source is displayed in the Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register di
96. registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 284 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Copy Link Directive File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a link directive file Figure 6 59 Copy Link Directive File from Dialog Box Copy Link Directive File from a Look in v50 test E a Sample dir a eH e E Files of type Link directive files dir Cancel Help o A This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Brows button after selecting Copy and Use the Existing file on the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDi rective File dialog box Select the Brows button after selecting Copy and Use the Existing file on the Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDi rective File dialog box Explanation of each area a Lookin Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to be the copy source from the drop down list User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 285 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file to be the copy source Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Function buttons Sets the
97. the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be executed Only a file name with extension imc can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 366 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Loads the specified file and executes the saved key operations Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 367 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Entry Macro Files dialog box This dialog box is used to register a macro file to a key Figure 6 106 Entry Macro Files Dialog Box ie Entry Macro Files E Program_Files NEC tool Macro a Entry Macro List Q TE shortcut delete E Program Files NEG tool None Cancel tl 3 Change Delete i a This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files 368 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Entry Macro List This area displays a list of the macro files that are already registered Files are added to the Play Back the Regis ter Macro menu in order from the top A registered macro is selected by selecting the title Title Displays the titles
98. the Edit window the windows were not saved s indicates the character string on the caption of the window Yes Save No Close the window without saving Cancel Return to the Edit window Q2001 Another process has changed s Do you wish to reload it The contents of the currently open file were changed by another application s indicates the updated file name Yes Read the new file No Display the Edit window without reading the file Q2002 s is already using It is opened as read only An attempt was made to read a file that has already been read s indicates the specified file name OK Open the file as Read Only Cancel Do nothing Q2003 s is already using Do you wish to open it as read only Revert to the original file if you select No An attempt was made to read a file that is already open and being edited s indicates the specified file name Yes Open the file as Read Only No Discard the edited contents and open the specified file Cancel Do nothing Q2004 s was not be found Do you wish to close this window A file on the currently open window has been deleted from the disk s indicates the deleted file name Yes Close the Edit window No Do not close the Edit window Q2005 s was not found Do you wish to save this file The file was deleted from the disk when an attempt was made to close the window being edited s indicates the caption of the window
99. the editor Make sure that the correct path and file name given The external editor could not be started up s indicates the path of the editor that could not be started up Check whether the set external editor exists If not use another editor or the editing function of PM plus E1504 s Failed to start up the debugger Make sure that the correct path and file name given The debugger could not be started up s indicates the path of the debugger that could not be started up Check whether the set debugger exists If not install it or specify another one E1505 User program is running Please stop it to execute the command The New Workspace Add New Project Insert Project Open Workspace Build and Debug or Debug command was executed while the user program was being executed Stop the user program via the debugger and execute it again E1506 Cannot execute this command while the debugger executing While the debugger was starting up an unexecutable command was selected Close the debugger and execute it again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1507 The file s was not found Abort to compile The source file specified when executing compilation could not be found The source file name for which compile was executed Is displayed to s Check whether the specified source file exists If not then create it E1508 Cannot add the build mode Please conform using the latest version comp
100. this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 342 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE k Scroll tab This tab is used to make settings related to scrolling in the Edit window Figure 6 91 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Scroll Tab PH plus Settings 1 Way of scrolling area Move Caret in High Speed by Ctrl Up Down arrow Keys If this check box is checked the caret is moved quickly by 5 lines by pressing the CTRL UP DOWN arrow keys default If it is not checked the caret is not moved quickly Move Caret with Page Scroll If this check box is checked the caret is also scrolled when the screen is scrolled default If it is not checked the caret does not move when the screen is scrolled Scroll Half Page as Page UP Down If this check box is checked the screen is scrolled by half a screen by pressing the Page Up Page Down keys If it is not checked the Page Up Page Down keys perform their normal operation 2 Mouse Wheel This area sets the number of lines to be scrolled when using the wheel button of Microsoft s IntelliMouse User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 343 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Function buttons Button Function K Enables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box I Find Replace tab This tab is used to make settings related to a search and replacement
101. this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Content When an object displayed as contents is selected this menu item is dis played as Display Object as Icon Displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as contents Displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as icons User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 151 6 Project menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Edt Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Select Active Project Add New Project Insert Project CVS Update CVS Commit CVS Log CVS Status CVS Diff Export Makefile Project Settings Add Source Files Add Project Related Files Add Other Files Direct Select Active Project 152 Select Active Porect Add New Project Insert Project CVS Update CYS Commit CVS Log CVS Status LVS Diff Export Makefile Project Settings Add Source Files Add Project Related Files Add Other Files Selects the project to be the target for the build processing Opens the Select Active Project dialog box Opens the wizard to add a new project into the workspace Inserts an existing project into the workspace Opens the Insert Project dialog box Acquires the source files registered in the server when CVS is used Reflects the contents of the modification of source files into the server when CVS is used Displays the log contents of the file whe
102. top layer only Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Collapses the third and subsequent layers and displays the first and second layers Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 149 150 Show Index 3 Show Index 4 Show Index 5 Collapse This Layer Apply Layer Rule CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Collapses the fourth and subsequent layers and displays the first to third lay ers Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Collapses the fifth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fourth lay ers Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Collapses the sixth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fifith lay ers Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Collapses the layer of the line t
103. wish to continue it from the end of file Continue it from the end of file if you select s Searching finished at the first line s indicates the key assigned to Up Yes Search from the last line No Stop searching Q2202 PM plus has finished searching this IDL source file Do you wish to continue it from the top of IDL source file Continue it from the top of IDL source file if you select s No character string could be discovered during the character string search in the source file s indicates the key assigned to Down Yes Continue searching from the start of the source file No Stop searching 406 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2203 PM plus has finished searching this IDL source file Do you wish to continue it from the end of IDL source file Continue it from the end of IDL source file if you select s No character string could be discovered during the character string search in the source file s indicates the key assigned to Up Yes Continue searching from the start of the source file No Stop searching Q2204 Do you wish to replace all the files Replacement of all the files was selected in global replacement Yes Replace all the files No Return to the active Edit window without doing anything Q2205 The search string was found in the IDL source file s Do you wish to replace in it During global replacement the character string to be searche
104. 1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 4 Inserting a project into a workspace Selecting the Project menu gt Insert Project opens Insert Project dialog box to insert an existing project into the project group 5 6 5 CVS update Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Update allows the CVS update command to be executed for the selected file and a file registered in the repository to be acuired The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 6 CVS commit Selecting the Project menu gt CVS commit executes the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflects the file in the repository The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 7 CVS log Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Log executes the CVS log command for the selected file and displays the log contents of the file on the Output window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the serve
105. 3 7 Jumping to a specified line Selecting the Find menu gt To a Specific Line opens Jump to Specified Line dialog box to jump to a specified desti nation line number 5 3 8 Jumping to a specified line in a specified source file Selecting the Find menu gt To the Specific Line in the Source file opens Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box to jump to a specified destination line number in a specified source file Note that To the Specific Line in the Source file menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 9 Jumping to a marked line Selecting the Find menu gt Mark Jump opens Mark Jump dialog box to register the current caret position as a mark or to jump to a marked line 5 3 10 Moving the caret to the top of line Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top of Line moves the caret to the top of the line to which the caret is currently positioned 5 3 11 Moving the caret to the end of line Selecting the Find menu gt To the End of Line moves the caret to the end of the line to which the caret is currently positioned User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 13 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 12 Moving the caret to the top of file Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top of File moves the caret to the top of the top line the top layer line of a file
106. 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is used select this radio button If Brows button is clicked the Link Directive File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If an existing link directive file is used the File Name button cannot be selected Caution In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing link directive file is copied and used select this radio button Specify the link directive file name to be the copy source and the link directive file name to be the copy destination If Brows button is clicked the Copy Link Directive File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the link directive file to be the copy source is displayed in the Copy from edit box as an absolu
107. 80 Moving the caret one word to the left 81 Moving the caret up by one line 81 Moving the caret down by one line 81 Moving the caret one character to the right 81 Moving the caret one character to the left 82 Making the Search Character String Specification combo box active 82 Layer Management 83 Sf Aaa qa aa ga RAR RRR RRS 4 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 Promoting layers 83 Demoting Layers 83 Expanding or collapsing one of the lower layers 84 Expanding one of the lower layers 84 Collapsing one of the lower layers 84 Expanding all of the lower layers 85 Expanding all of the layers 85 Collapsing all of the layers 85 Expanding a specified number of layers 85 Collapsing a specified number of layers 85 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 5 5 9 6 5 7 11 Displaying the top layer only 86 12 Displaying the first and second layers 86 13 Displaying the first to third layers 86 14 Displaying the first to fourth layers 86 15 Displaying the first to fifth layers 86 ric E E S ge 16 Collapsing a layer at the caret 86 anaa g 4 17 Applying a layer rule 87 Display Functions 88 5 5 1 Displaying a list of functions 88 Displaying a list of layers 88 Displaying the standard bar 88 Displaying the build bar 88 Displaying the option bar 88 Displaying the external tool bar 88 Displaying the sta
108. C Source Files Include Files Project Related Files Other Files ServoLibrary For Help press F1 L 7 Ean ta ee IDL file An IDL file is a file used to save the layer information for PM plus idea L information file 24 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Functions and Features The major functions and features of PM plus are as follows Managing multiple projects PM plus can manage multiple project files collectively by using concepts such as workspace and project group Starting a builder PM plus can be used to start tools required for generating application systems a compiler structured assembler assembler linker ROM ization processor necessary for storing programs in ROM and a hex converter Starting editor PM plus can be used to create or modify the source files to be used for a project by the editor function which PM plus provides Furthermore an external editor can also be registered and started form PM plus Starting a debugger PM plus can be used to start NEC Electronics debugger or system simulator When a correction of the source pro gram is issued from the debugger PM plus displays a specified line of the specified file Registering and executing external tools Other applications the user often uses can be included in the menu of PM plus and started from this menu Linking with a source management tool Version management of the source program in the softwar
109. Collapse This Layer 86 150 Batch Rebuild 113 153 Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box 247 Build 113 153 Commands corresponding to key operations 118 Batch Build 153 Compile 112 153 Batch Build Settings 115 Copy 67 143 Batch Build 113 Copy for Append 67 143 Batch Rebuild 153 Copy Link Directive File from dialog box 285 Build 113 153 Copy Startup File from dialog box 279 Build and Debug 112 153 Customize 118 156 Build Settings 115 153 Customize dialog box 350 Clean 114 153 Cut 67 143 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 421 Cut for Append 67 143 CVS Commit 109 152 CVS Commit dialog box 291 CVS Diff 110 152 CVS Log 109 152 CVS Log dialog box 293 CVS Status 109 152 CVS Status dialog box 295 CVS Update 109 152 CVS Update dialog box 289 D Debug 114 153 Debug Build 301 303 Debugger Settings 116 155 Debugger Settings dialog box 313 Definitions of words 177 Delete 69 143 Delete the Line 69 144 Delete the Word 69 144 Delete to the End of Line 69 144 Delete to the End of Word 69 144 Delete to the Top of Line 69 144 Demote 83 149 Destroy All 64 142 Development tools 27 Device File Installer 117 155 Dialog box About PM plus 380 Add Build Mode 303 Add Command 310 Add New Memo 276 Add New Project Step 1 8
110. Copy 68 143 38 141 Insert File dialog box 190 71 144 109 152 Insert Project dialog box 264 Insert file Insert New Object Insert Project Installing 29 J Jump 229 231 256 Jump to Specified Line dialog box 229 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box 231 L Layer 149 Apply Layer Rule 84 149 85 149 Collapse the Specific Layer 86 150 87 150 Collapse Collapse All 85 149 Collapse This Layer 83 149 Expand 84 149 Expand All 85 149 Expand All Lower Layers Demote 85 149 Expand the Specific Layer 85 149 Expand Collapse 84 149 83 149 86 149 86 149 86 150 86 150 86 150 Promote Show Index 1 Show Index 2 Show Index 3 Show Index 4 Show Index 5 88 151 Layer List dialog box 256 Layer List Layer Management 83 Layermenu 149 Layer rule 188 191 248 Link 71 145 Link Directive File dialog box 283 Link Directive File to register dialog box 287 Load the Macro File 128 156 Load the Macro File dialog box 364 M Main window 139 Drag and drop function 163 Make Function Prototypes 71 144 Mark Jump 73 147 Mark Jump dialog box 233 Menu bar 140 Messages 382 N NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web New 38 141 New Workspace Step 1 8 dialog box 43 131 158 New Workspace Step 2 8 dialog box 45 New Workspace Step 3 8 dialog box 46 New Workspace
111. Customize keyboard Meru Toolbar User Menu keyword Customize Menu 3 Right Button Menu Reset l 4 wiew Menu New Workspace Open Workspace nave Workspace Close Workspace Saye eye AS save All separator Add gt Remove Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to be set from the drop down list Menu List This area lists menu items included in the menu selected in Menu Select a menu item to be added Customize Menu This area is used to select the menu to be customized View Menu This area displays the menu items currently specified for the menu selected in Customize Menu User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 355 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Function buttons Button Function Add gt gt Inserts the menu item selected in Menu List at the position selected in View Menu Remove Deletes the menu item selected in View Menu Separator Inserts a separating line at the position selected in View Menu Reset Returns the configuration of the selected menu to the default state Moves the menu item selected in View Menu up Down Moves the menu item selected in Buttons down O N O Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Cancel Does not enable the specified items and closes the dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box e Keyword tab This tab is used to set the keywords to be hi
112. DOW REFERENCE About PM plus dialog box This dialog box is used to display the version information about PM plus If a project file is open the version of the NEC Electronics tools corresponding to that project and the device file is also displayed Figure 6 112 About PM plus Dialog Box About PH plus pen Integrated Development Environment Platform HES PM plus 5 20 ser sor ox Copyright NEC Electronics Corporation 2002 2004 All rights reserved Tool version E IDS50 Worse oer ara E SME50 Worse xx xxx H CASSO Waar aor ocr ar b pe Device File H WPO OS 0231 02 7 02 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Help menu gt About PM plus 380 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Tool version This area displays the device type of the currently open project file and the version of the related tools under prod uct name version date If the tree is opened the file name is displayed with the full path b Device File This area displays the device name file name and version of the device file used in the currently open project file under device name device file name version date If the tree is opened the device file name is displayed with the full path Function buttons Bon Function Closes the dialog b
113. End of Line in Saving a File M Make 4 Backup File T Clear The Undo Buffer in Saving a File Extension of Backup File 4 IDL File bk Extension User Specify Extension d Ex cpp h User Extension List TEST File Bak Automatic Backup 5 Don t Save Save The File Every 10 minutes Cancel Help Pelete Down im a E slat cL Wi 1 Watch This area specifies the operation when the file being edited is updated by another application Update The File Automatically If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM plus is changed by another process such as an editor the file is read again automatically Don t Update The File If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM plus is changed by another process such as an editor the file is not read again Display Message If Changed by Other Process When a file that is opened in PM plus is changed by another process such as an editor a message is dis played to verify whether the file is read again or not default User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 32 328 2 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File setting area Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s If this check box is checked files are always read with layer when they are opened including all the drag and drop operations and file histories Enable All Layer Rule s Options If this check box is checked all the options of the layer rule used whe
114. Function Prototypes of index1 Source file at caret position to top of the Index1 Source file Adds the function defined in the first layer Source file at the caret position in the Edit window as a prototype decla ration at the top of the layer b Add Function Prototypes of each Index1 Source files to the top of each Index1 Source file Adds the function defined in each first layer Source file in the Edit window as a prototype declaration at the top of the layer No addition is made to a read only file Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 217 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Add Function Prototypes to the top of file Adds a function defined in the Edit window as a prototype declaration to the top of the file d Make new windows of Function Prototypes Creates a function defined in the Edit window as a prototype declaration to a new window e Make header file of Function Prototypes Creates a new first layer header file at the top of the IDL file being edited and creates a function defined in the IDL file being edited as a prototype declaration This IDL file must be that which has a source file and divides the source file in units of first layers The header file name to be created can be directly input in Header file Name or can be specified in the Select Include File dialog box displayed by selecting the button The default include file extension is h f Insert the include sentence to the each sourc
115. ING AND EXITING 2 J Installing PM plus 29 2 2 Uninstalling PM plus 29 3 J Starting 31 3 2 Exiting 31 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 32 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 ge ae ge a a N Oo fF WO PD J Overview 32 Creating Workspace 33 Setting Options Related to Compilation Selecting Active Project 35 Selecting Debugger 36 Executing Build 37 Other Settings 37 File Management 38 5 Creating anew file 38 Opening a existing file 38 Inserting afile 38 Closing a window 38 Creating a new workspace Opening a workspace 57 CO N O OO A OO N Saving a workspace 62 9 Closing a workspace 62 OY i OY s N RE Ra O E e mm eek tik 12 Saving all files 63 11 Saving a file with anew name 31 34 38 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Project manager V3 xx 38 10 Saving a file by overwriting 63 63 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 5 2 5 3 aaa na m o a e o o Se Se a Ce Ca 13 14 pO 16 17 18 19 20 27 22 23 1 24 Saving all files Changed files only 63 Saving and Closing all files 64 Closing all windows 64 Closing all windows without saving 64 Changing a source file name 64 Saving all source files 64 Checking printing status 64 Printing 65 Printing directly 65 History of file
116. M plus and install PM plus again Or return to the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File F0127 Cannot read the data file for creating the sample link directive file Make sure that PM plus has installed correctly The data file to be used for creating the link directive file sample is damaged In the last dialog box of the wizard click the Cancel button close PM plus and install PM plus again Or return to the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File F0128 s The internal RAM area information not found The sample link directive file cannot be created The name of a device with no internal RAM was specified s indicates the specified device name Return to the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box and select other than Create and Use the sample File Select any other device with internal RAM in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box F0129 s Failed to start up NEC Electronics tool Please check the NEC Electronics tool is installed correctly The DLL of the NEC Electronics tool could not be loaded s indicates the name of the file that could not be loaded Verify that the NEC Electronics tool product is installed correctly 386 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0130 Failed to copy the file Failed to copy the file The o
117. Mame CAYE5U testyeme50 pry Project Group smbal Project Title 2 _ Seres Name Device Name 3 gt veso eae JuPD 703102 Device Install Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Information display area Project File Name The name of the project file is displayed Folder The project folder specified in the project file is displayed Workspace File Name The name of the workspace file to which the project belongs is displayed with an absolute path The file name is automatically determined as project file name extension prw Project Group The name of the project group to which the project belongs is displayed If you wish to change the name of the project group after this wizard terminates click the name of that project group with the right mouse button in the Project window and select the Edit Project Group Name menu 2 Project Title The project title to be displayed in the Project window is displayed If the project title is modified here the modification is reflected in the Project window Up to 260 characters can be entered for a project title User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 59 3 60 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Series Name and Device Name The series and device name of the target device to be used are displayed They can be changed by selecting from the drop down lists in which all the series and device names of the installed dev
118. NEC Electronics can be selected lt Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 RTOS When using the NEC Electronics real time OS select the name of real time OS when not using that select Not use from the drop down list All the names of the real time OS for NEC Electronics V850 series that have been installed are displayed on the drop down list If the name of the real time OS to be used is selected the RTOS setting button becomes valid and clicking this button opens the dialog box for setting the real time OS Refer to the user s manual of the real time OS for details on the setting User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 45 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Specify a startup file This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Figure 5 4 New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 378 Startup File Please specify the Startup File 1 Workspace Information 1 gt amp Copy and Use the Sample file 2 Select Real Time OS 23 Startup Filej 2 T ich j fine Use the Existing file Browsen 4 Register Mode 3 S C Copy and Use the Existing file 5 Link Directive File Fogy ham H 4 amp Do Not specify now 8 Confirmation H VE50 Seres Only 2 5 6 Setup Source Fi
119. OW REFERENCE 1 Function buttons Button Function Add Opens the Add Command dialog box The specified command is inserted to the currently selected position in the command list box Edit Opens the Add Command dialog box Changes the command contents selected in the Command list box to the edited contents Remove Deletes the command selected in the command list box U Moves the selected command up within the command list Down Moves the selected command down within the command list OK Enables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box c After Build Process tab If there is any processing required after build copying of output files to another folder etc this processing is set here The set items are always executed after build The order of execution is from the top of the list Commands can be specified in the Add Command dialog box by clicking the Add button Figure 6 72 Build Settings Dialog Box After Build Process Tab Build Settings EJ Build Fre Build Process After Build Process Command Remove Add Edit fal Down Cancel Help 308 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 1 Function buttons Button Add CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function Opens the Add Command dialog box The specified command is inserted to the currently selected position in the com mand
120. RENCE c Project Group Name Select the project group name to which the project is added Up to 20 projects can be registered per project group If a new project group is added enter the group name in the combo box directly Function buttons Inserts the selected project group into the workspace Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 265 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Source Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add source files to a project Figure 6 48 Add Source Files Dialog Box Add Source Files main kl ES a Look in E VE50_ test Til ce test4 c a start s fan System fan testl c a test2 c a tests c lb Omn Files of type Source Files c c2s s Cancel Help Add Files from Folder A This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Add Source Files Select the Project menu gt Project Settings Source File tab Select the Add button on the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Source Files in the Project window Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the source files to be inserted from the drop down list Bl
121. The displayed file could not be renamed when the stack850 command or dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be renamed Check if the displayed file is being used by another application If it is being used by another application close the application and try again F0604 s The load module file was required in order to execute the dump850 command Please execute build to generate it The load module file could not be found when the dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indi cates the name of the load module file that could not be found Execute build generate a load module file and try again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 389 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES FO700 ToolLinkManager is not running During connection to the server the communication path of ToolLink TIS TLM returned its own fatal error Restart the tool to be used FO701 cannot communicate with s During connection to the server the server was logged out and the communication path of ToolLink TIS TLM returned an error S indicates the name of the logged out tool Restart the displayed tool 390 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 3 List of Operation Error Messages The operation error messages output by PM plus are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the message in message number order All opefration error messages have E prefixed to the
122. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http www renesas com inquiry sCENESAS 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is grante
123. WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Newly registers the dragged source file in the selected project Open Source File Opens the source file in the Edit window without registering it to a project Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 298 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to select the project for batch build or rebuild and set the build sequence The settings in this dialog box are saved in a workspace file when the workspace is saved Figure 6 66 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build a esuild Project and Build Order Ok Mi Sutton Button Control Debug Build Button Button Control Release Build JCD Button Control Debug Build JCD Button Control Release Build Welman Servo Control Debug Build main Servo Control Release Build ServoLibrary Servo Control Debug Build ServoLibrary Servo Control Release Build Cancel Help Adil This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Build menu gt Batch Build Settings User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 299 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Build Project and Build Order This area displays the names of the projects registered in the open workspace wi
124. a byte PROGBITS 7AW tidata byte tibss byte NOBITS 7AW ti bss byte tidata word PROGBI TS 7AW tidata word tibss word NOBITS TAW tibss word tidata PROGBI TS TAW tidata tibss NOBI TS TAW tibss sidata PROGBITS 7AW Si data Si DSS NOBITS TAW sibss __tp_TEXT TP_SYMBOL gp DATA GP_ SYMBOL amp tp_TEXT DATA ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 415 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Use RX850 and Use Internal memory only are selected Sample link directive file use rx850 use internal memory only copyright and other notices ST ILOAD RX eSt PROGBI TS TAX sit Ji SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBI TS 7A sconst he CONST LOAD R const PROGBI TS 7A const E TEXT ILOAD RX pro_epi_ runtime PROGBITS AX pro_ epi runtime SEKT PROGBITS AX text Ja SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidata byte PROGBITS 7AW tidata byte tibss byte NOBITS ZAW ti bss byte tidata word PROGBI TS 7AW tidata word tibss word NOBI TS TAW tibss word tidata PROGBI TS 7AW tidata tibss NOBI TS TAW tibss Sidata PROGBITS 7AW Si data SI DSS NOBITS 7AW sibss E DATA ILOAD RW VOxffel00 data PROGBI TS 7AW data sdata PROGBITS AWG sSdata
125. a new file and open an existing text file An attempt was made to change the set font value for when a new document is created or a text file is read by selecting the Default button in the Font dialog box OK Change the set value of the font Cancel Return to the Font dialog box without doing anything Q2703 The debugger was not selected Do you wish to select the debugger The Debug menu item was selected but the debugger was not selected OK Open the Debugger Settings dialog box Cancel Return to the active window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 409 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2704 The tag jump format not specified Cannot jump to the error line if you don t set this Do you wish do it The tag jump format has not been specified when using an external editor is selected Yes If another environmental setting page is selected move to that page If the OK button is clicked return to the active window No Return to the external editor page Q2705 Found key settings of Project Manager standard editor idea L Do you wish to use this settings The key setting of idea L could be found Yes Copy the key setting of idea L so that it can also be used in PM plus No Do not use the key setting of idea L and use the default key setting of PM plus 410 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 5 List of Information Messages The information messages output be PM plus are listed below together the c
126. ables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box i View tab This tab is used to make settings related to window display Figure 6 89 PM plus Settings Dialog Box View Tab PH plus Settings Workspace External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File window Pah Edit view Layer Scrol Find Replace Show Set Color Character Set Color Underline Set Color 7 W CR and EOF Tab Characters Window M Horizontal Scroll Bar M Vertical Scroll Bar CR and EOF Set Color Read nly Source File Set Color 3 Indent Tab Characters s oo wo 4 _ gt _ Title C Show Filename f Show Filename and Full Path S gt Put Caret at The Top Line as opened idl File M Appear Flat Toolbar 8 6 gt Memorize number of Tab Characters each window Cancel Help 1 Show Under Line with Caret Line If this check box is checked an underline is displayed at the caret line on the Edit window CR and EOF If this check box is checked a blue is displayed for a linefeed code CR and EOF is displayed for a ter minating code EOF default Tab Characters If this check box is checked a Tab code is displayed in a gray User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 339 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Window Horizontal Scroll Bar If this check box is
127. ack Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Create and Use the Sample file If this radio button is selected a sample link directive file is created in the project folder in accordance with the selection in Memory Usage area and the selection of the OS in the New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box The link directive file is created under the name project file name dir and registered to the project related files automatically The link directive file that is created is registered to the project related files automatically The name of the link directive file to be registered is displayed in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box as an absolute path If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Refer to APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE for the contents of the link directive file to be created 50 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Caution The link directive file that is created must be customized in accordance with the target specification or user defined sections In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2
128. aking the Build Mode Selection combo box active Selecting Build menu gt Direct Build Mode Selection makes the Build Mode Selection combo box of the toolbar active The build mode can be selected User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 115 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 Tool Management 5 8 1 Setting options for each tool The Tool menu displays the menu items for setting the tool options executed on PM plus Refer to the user s manual of each tool for the operation of the selected menu 5 8 2 Estimating stack size Selecting the Tool menu gt stack850 starts up stack850 a tool to estimate the stack with size option and dis plays the result on the Edit window This menu item is displayed only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active The object whose stack is measured is the assembler file generated from the source files of the active project The estimated results are saved under the file name project file name stk If the same file name already exists the previous file is renamed project file name stk bak The execution of stack850 can be stopped by using the ESC key In this case the results are not displayed Refer to the CA850 compiler package user s manual for details on stack850 5 8 3 Dumping the load module file or the object file Selecting the Tool menu gt dump850 opens the dump850 dialog box and starts up the dump command dump850 The results are displayed on the Edit window Th
129. al U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 4 Operating Environments The following environments are required in order to use PM plus Caution The operation of PM plus is not guaranteed in a network environment Do not use PM plus in a network environment 1 Host machine IBM PC AT or compatible machine on which the following operation systems can operate CPU Pentium Il 400MHz or higher Memory 128M byte or more OS Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 Workstation SP3 or later Windows XP Professional Edition Home Edition Caution Regardless of which OS is used Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher and the latest Service Pack must be installed Screen size 800 600 pixel or more 2 DLL The following DLL files provided by Microsoft Corp are required mfc42 dll V6 0 8665 0 or more lIt is provided when PM plus is installed msvctr dll V6 1 or more It is provided when PM plus is installed ComCtl32 dll V5 81 or more It is necessary to install in addition to PM plus 3 Related development tools 78K Series Assembler RA78KO NEC Electronics V3 70 Note or later RA78KOS NEC Electronics V1 50 Note or later RA78K4 NEC Electronics V1 70 Note or later Compiler CC78KO NEC Electronics V3 60 Note or later CC78KOS NEC Electronics V1 60 Note or later CC78K4 NEC Electronics V2 50 Note or later Debugger ID78KO NS NEC Electronics V2 52 or later ID78KOS NS NEC Elect
130. alog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 319 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Compare dialog box This dialog box is used to compare the contents of two Edit windows Figure 6 78 File Compare Dialog Box File Compare a Crizginal file EAVE50 test testl c Ey b Another file EAVS850 test test2 c W Compare collapse layer Upward c W Compare layer number d W Display files side by side a start position f Top line i Caret position Cancel ue Help Figure 6 79 File Compare Dialog Box Mini File compare Up Details Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt File Compare 320 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a c Original file Select the original file to be compared from the drop down list If there is an active Edit window the name of the file in that window is selected If there is no active Edit window this area is left blank A list of all the files currently being edited is displayed on the drop down list If the button is clicked the Open dialog box is opened to select the any file In the Open dialog box the Apply Layer Rule and Gather Files into an Edit Window check boxes and the Layer Rule button are invalid Another fi
131. alog box causes a make file to be created automatically Refer to the 5 6 10 Exporting a make file for details of make file cre ation User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 91 92 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The dialog boxes to be displayed differ depending on the selection The wizard flow of each selection is shown below Figure 5 19 The Wizard Flow of Add New Project Dialog Boxes Step 1 8 Project Information No Specification of V850 series and non library Yes Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Step 3 8 Startup File Copy and Use the Sample file Me Yes Step 4 8 Register Mode Step 5 8 Link Directive File Step 6 8 Setup Source Files Specification of V850 series and non library Yes Step 7 8 Select Debugger Step 8 8 Confirmation User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The configuration of a typical dialog box is described below a Add New Project Step 178 Project Information Workspace File Name l l CAVSSO testi System pra Project Information e leaner Select Real Time OS H hape o _ Startup File l Register Mode Project File Mame Link Directive File sample pr a Setup 5 Fil a Project Folder aa ai C WOSO test Taree Select Debugger Confirmation Project Title sample H W850 Series Only 2 5 Geres Mame Device Hame We50 Senes JuPD 703102
132. alog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Caution In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Do Not specify now When no link directive file is specified select this radio button A link directive file can be specified by selecting a project related file folder on the Project window and then select ing Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options after exiting the wizard Caution In the environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now button is selected automatically and other items become invalid User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 103 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 The Link Directive File Name to register Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the
133. ame and try again E1007 PM plus cannot divide the source files there were the 1st layers hasn t lower layer Not Divide the Source File was not checked when saving a source file or changing a source file name but the file could not be divided because there was a first layer without the lower layers Attach lower layers to the first layer line E1008 A file name cannot contain any of the characters lt gt An attempt was made to create a file with a file name that includes prohibited characters Set the file name using characters other than the displayed prohibited ones E1009 This filename already exists Please enter other filename When changing the source file name an attempt was made to change the file name to an existing source file name Set a different file name and try again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 391 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1010 The filename was not set The source file name has not been set in the Change Source File Names dialog box Set the file name and try again E1011 s was not found s used to specify a character string when setting the user comment mark of the source file name was not entered Enter s in the set user comment and try again E1012 Cannot include s many times When setting the comment mark multiple s were set Enter one s in the set user comment and try again E1013 IDL Control Error Please set the Control Mark to same comment mark of the source file by Chan
134. ample shows main ServoLi brary H Button Control 3 Project s ee 7 Servo Control 2 Project s Et SB main a ra Source Files H kan test c H Ee test oc E test2 c l l E test2 c El test3 c Library files etc can be regis Pe teste B E test4 c tered o B B testd c Include Files ae J Include Files a fim Project Related Files Specifications etc can be freely Fa Gy Project Belated Files H E Other Files registered Gi Other Files gt ook eee eee eee ee oo Source Files coil E E Include Files Eompilenr Options sa ie a ries Assembler Woon Edit Project Title Project setings Delete Project Register order Ascending order Fix Window Click the right mouse button after selecting The project ServoLibrary is set as the project ServoLibrary the active project In PM plus multiple projects can be registered or managed together with related projects in a project group User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 35 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 5 Selecting Debugger Selecting the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings displays the Debugger Settings dialog box in which the debugger to be used can be set In this dialog box all the NEC Electronics debuggers and simulators that are installed in the host machine can be dis played and selected After executing build by selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug the debugger that is set here starts up automat ically and dow
135. ancel b Folder Cancel ef E C Double Slash fe Ak oR IC C Semicolon C Sharp C Original Mark Setting This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select Change File Names with multiple source file names selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area a Extension If all the selected files have the same extension the extension is displayed If the files have different extensions this area is left blank b Folder If all the selected files are saved in the same folder the folder is displayed If the files have different settings this area is left blank Clicking the button opens the dialog box to select the folder c Comment Mark If all the selected files have the same setting the current comment mark is selected Otherwise nothing is selected Clicking the Original Mark or Setting button opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 203 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Changes the IDL file name to the specified file name Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Setting Opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which the comment mark for the specified file can be changed 204 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Comment Mark dial
136. and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of a To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c xly Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear 6 This Source File Only If this box is checked only the source file to which the caret is currently positioned is searched Function buttons Find Next Searches for a match for the search key If Display Mini Dialog is checked the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution When the ESC key is pressed the search is aborted The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed at the next search If a search cannot find any match for the search key the operator is notified by the issue of a mes
137. ange selection has been performed the caret moves one word to the right and the range from the position where range selection started to the new caret position is re selected If lines have been selected with range selection nothing is performed Note that One Word Right menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 80 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 29 Moving the caret one word to the left Selecting the Find menu gt One Word Left moves the caret one word to the left If the caret is positioned to the left end of a line the caret dose not move The definitions of words are as follows Consecutive single byte alohanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding spaces and tabs When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves one word to the left When this check box is not checked if range selection has been performed the caret moves one word to the left and the range from the position where range selection started to the new caret position is re selected If lines have been selected with range selection nothing is performed Note that One Word Left menu item is not displa
138. anged files only By selecting the File menu gt Save All Changed files Only the contents of all the Edit window currently opened are saved by the same file name However the contents of the Edit window including those that have not been modified is not saved Note that Save All Changed files Only menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 63 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 14 Saving and Closing all files Selecting the File menu gt Save and Close All saves all of the files currently open in the Edit window and then closes the windows The Project window and the Output window are not closed Note that Save and Close All menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 15 Closing all windows Selecting the File menu gt Close All closes all the Edit window currently open If any of the contents have been changed a message for confirming whether the changes are to be saved is displayed The Project window and the Out put window are not closed Note that Close All menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 16 Closing
139. anks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 266 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the source file to be inserted Up to 256 characters can be specified The source file exten sion depends on the series name registered in the project If a list file in which source file names are described is specified for the file name Ist csv the source files described in the list file are added to the project A list file is a text file with a file name described on each line Ist or a CSV file csv Caution In Windows 98 and Windows Me when source file name ex aaa c is input a message is displayed but the file name is not correctly displayed in that message When this occurs just close the message for future trou ble free operation Function buttons Adds the specified source files to the project Multiple source files can be added Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Add Files from Folder Opens the Brows for Folder dialog box from which the source files to be added are specified in the folder unit All of the source files in the selected folder are added to the project User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 267 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Group Name dialog box This dialog box is used to change a project group name Figure 6 49 Project Group Name Dialog
140. anks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 21 1 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a startup file The specified startup file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 2 8 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Copy Startup File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Figure 6 56 Copy Startup File from Dialog Box Copy Startup File from Ei ES a Look in E VE50_test aje l ce a dats a System Files of type Star up files 0 3 Cancel Help 2 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Brows button after selecting Copy and Use the Existing file on the New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Select the Brows button after selecting Copy and Use the Existing file on the Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Explanation of each area a Lookin Select the drive or folder that includes the startup file to be the copy source from the drop down list User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 279 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Spec
141. anual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the current active file into a specified file Figure 6 14 Save As Dialog Box a gt Save in VobU_test Al ce test c test testa c File name Sala b Save as type SourceF ile kcx c2s s Cancel Help e Pyle Hame c fe teate the Source Files CH Code MS Windows CR LF C UNE OS LF C Mac OS CR E GOUE Ehana soute Ale Hame Wotan d This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Save As Explanation of each area a Save in Select the drive or folder in which the file is to be saved from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 195 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Save as type File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If the file has no name a file name created based on the contents of the first line is dis played If the first line has no characters the file name is displayed as Untitled The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above Save as type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types ar
142. artup file An attempt was made to add a file specified at startup as a linker option s indicates the name of the file attempted to be added E1421 Cannot register the file any more When adding source file or other files an attempt was made to register more than the maximum number of files source files 2 048 other files 100 E1422 s The file except extension has already set The specified file name without extension has already been set as a source file s indicates the specified file name Rename the file using a different file name and add the source file again E1423 The file except extension has already set Do you wish to continue to add source files The specified file name without extension has already been set as a source file s indicates the specified file name Rename the file using a different file name and add the source file again E1424 The project s already entered When adding a new project or inserting a project a project file name that has already been registered was speci fied s indicates the project file name Set another file name and register it User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 397 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1425 A project group cannot be registered into this workspace any more Please register the project into the exist ing project group When adding a new project or inserting a project an attempt was made to add more than the maximum number of project groups 128 when a new project gr
143. as been performed in the downward direction and performs a tag jump to the next occurrence On the display it is not possible to return to the window from which a tag jump is per formed 5 3 27 Continuing a tag jump upward Once a tag jump has been performed selecting the Find menu gt Next Tag Jump Upward continues the search for the line in a tag jump format in the window from which the tag jump has been performed in the upward direction and per forms a tag jump to the next occurrence On the display it is not possible to return to the window from which a tag jump is performed Note that Next Tag Jump Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 28 Moving the caret one word to the right Selecting the Find menu gt One Word Right moves the caret one word to the right If the caret is positioned to the right end of a line the caret dose not move The definitions of words are as follows Consecutive single byte alohanumeric characters and underscores Consecutive characters other than the above excluding spaces and tabs When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves one word to the right When this check box is not checked if r
144. ation are opened in the default size of PM plus 334 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Memorize of Windows Position This area is used to select whether the window position is saved during editing If the relevant check box is checked the window position is saved when the window Is closed If it is not checked the window position is not saved By default all check boxes are checked 3 Always Maximize PM plus If this check box is checked the previous information is ignored and PM plus starts up in the maximum size 4 Function buttons Button Function Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box g Path tab This tab is used to make settings related to paths Figure 6 87 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Path Tab PH plus Settings Workspace External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File Window Fath Edit WEEN Layer l Scroll FindsReplace 1 Shift FV 2 Ctrl F1 3 E hift Ctrl F1 Make Backup File in Specited Folder Polder CANECT oola bin S 3 UpernSave in Specified Folder Polder CANECT ools32 bin a 4 Folder for Macro File C NNECTools32 bin B Cancel Help User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 335 336 1 2 3 4 5 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE External HELP This area specifies the paths for
145. ause and action to take in response to the message in massage number order All information messages have l prefixed to the message number When these messages are displayed the users must select the OK button as consent 13000 Another process has changed s If you wish to reload it Please change read only attribute The source file has been updated but the IDL file is Read Only and could not be read again s indicates the source file name in the IDL file 13001 PM plus will open the backup file The backup file of the IDL file was specified when the file was read 13002 s This file is using by the other process It is opened as read only A file opened by another application was specified to be opened s indicates the file name 13003 s This file is binary file It is opened as read only PM plus judged that the file to be read was a binary file s indicates the file name 13004 s This file is read only It is opened as read only The file specified to be opened was Read Only s indicates the open file name 13005 A workspace s1 will be opened instead of the specified project s2 A prj file was specified but it has a corresponding workspace so an attempt is being made to open that work space S1 indicates the name of the workspace file to be opened that corresponds with the project and s2 indicates the project file name specified by the user 13200 The search string was not found The specif
146. ayed by default When this value is specified for the first time 1 is displayed b Collapse Caret Line Only When this check box is checked only the layers lower than the line at the caret position are collapsed When this check box is not checked all of the specified lower layers are expanded default Function buttons OK Collapses the specified number of layers If a layer higher than the one specified is already collapsed there is no change Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 247 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Layer Rule dialog box This dialog box is used to apply a layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window or set the layer rule to be applied when files are read By default all check boxes are checked Figure 6 39 Set Layer Rule Dialog Box set Layer Rule a al gt ifi aaa bMode Cancel switch SetwwindowTextt Str o Cael case default Help gt else for Apply Layer Rule Ste GetText a while do while const struct Function PreProcessor c gt Apply Layer Rule only the Range You Selected This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule Select the Layer Rule button in the Open dialog box
147. be positioned to the fifth layer Note that Show Index 5 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 16 Collapsing a layer at the caret Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse This Layer collapses the layer of the line to which the caret positioned If the caret line has lower layers and these lower layers are expanded the lower layers will also be collapsed 86 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 17 Applying a layer rule Selecting the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box in which a layer rule can be applied to the contents of the Edit window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 87 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 5 Display Functions 5 5 1 Displaying a list of functions Selecting the View menu gt Function List opens the Function List dialog box to list the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window The list of functions can be saved in the TEXT or CSV format with the Save the Function List dialog box 5 5 2 Displaying a list of layers Selecting the View menu gt Layer List opens the Layer List dialog box to list the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window 5 5 3 Displaying the standard bar Selecting the View menu gt Standard Bar toggles the standard bar between on and
148. be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If an existing file is used the File Name button cannot be selected 3 Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is copied and used select this radio button Specify the startup file name to be the copy source and the startup file name to be the copy destination If Brows button is clicked the Copy Startup File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be the copy source is displayed in the Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a rela tive path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard 4 Do Not specify now When no startup file is specified now select this radio button In this case a startup file can be specified by selecting the project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add
149. between Double Single Quotations as Tag Jump If this check box is checked if a character string enclosed by or at the jump origin is at the jump destination when a tag jump is executed that character string is range selection default If it is not checked range selec tion is not executed Don t Move Caret as Paste If this check box is checked the caret position is not moved to the place where character string or line is pasted If is not checked the caret position is moved to the paste location Use Auto Indent If this check box is checked the caret is moved to the previous indent line when a linefeed occurs default If it is not checked the caret is displayed on the first line when a linefeed occurs User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 33 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Release Range Selected Before Jump If this check box is checked the range selection is cleared before the caret is moved when a menu related to jump is executed If it is not checked the caret is moved from the starting position to the destination of the caret or the closest position to it while range selection is being executed Beep Warning Sound If this check box is checked an alarm sound is output when warning message Is displayed 2 Double Click This area is used to select the double click operation Layer Expand Collapse Expands or collapses the lower layers Select a Word Selects a word including the caret with range selection wh
150. box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 257 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select Active Project dialog box This dialog box is used to select the active project Figure 6 43 Select Active Project Dialog Box Select Active Project a Select Project Button Gono mgt Gancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Select Active Project Explanation of each area a Selet Project This area displays the currently selected project name To change the active project select from the drop down list in which all the currently registered project name are displayed Function buttons Makes the selected project active Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 258 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the information on the active project The information is set on the following tabs a Project Information tab b Source File tab Figure 6 44 Project Settings Dialog Box Project Settines YODO Series uPDOS000 pK Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Caution Opening Select the Project menu gt Project Settings Select the right mouse button menu gt Proje
151. box Figure 5 24 Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File Dialog Box Add Hew Project Step 5 6 Link Directive File Please specify the Link Directive File 1 Project Information 2 Select Real Time O5 1 Memon Usage G Use Intermal memon only C Use External memory 3 Startup File 4 Register Mode 2 Use the Existing file 5 Link Directive File 3 Copy and Use the Existing file E Setup Source Files Eopp tron Create and Use the Sample file RTE nn IO 0000000000000000 000000000000000 000000000 0000o Brose r Select Debugger ae 6 Confirmation 4 f Do Not specify now H VB50 Series Only 2 5 The Link Directive File Name bo register 5 pefC WE50_test sample di File Name The link directive file describes information about the allocation of program code and data ln case of using the sample file Please customize it according as your target If you map the exterral ROM to the internal ROM area in ROM less mode please select use intemal memory only The specied link directive file is registered to the Project Related Files Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Create and Use the Sample file If this radio button is selected a sample link directive file is created in the project folder in accordance with the selection in Memory Usage area and the selection of the OS in the Add
152. box is used to specify the current caret position as a mark or to make a jump to a marked line Figure 6 31 Mark Jump Dialog Box a PP HMarkName b gt hiarkList Jump Bemaove Close RUE Help oe c ame JESWOSU_test test c Line Funcl This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Find menu gt Mark Jump Explanation of each area a MarkName Sets the mark names The contents of that line at the caret position are displayed by default The mark name can be set by the user freely and up to 5119 characters can be set Moreover uppercase charac ters and lowercase characters are distinguished for the mark name Clicking the Add button register a mark Up to 20 marks can be registered Note that the same name cannot be set more than once User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 233 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b MarkList Selects the marks If a mark is registered the registered mark name is displayed When the mark name is selected the selected mark name is displayed in the Mark Name edit box Selecting mark and jumping Clicking the Jump button after selecting a mark or double clicking a mark makes a jump to the mark position in the window being edited Selecting mark and deleting Clicking the Remove button or the DEL key after selecting a mark deletes the selected mark Mu
153. ce file down within the list 5 1 8 Saving a workspace 5 all Pr 62 Selecting the File menu gt Save Workspace saves the currently opened workspace The information of the opened workspace and the project s is saved into the current file by overwriting 1 9 Closing a workspace Selecting the File gt Close Workspace closes all the currently opened windows At this time you can select whether the Edit window are to be closed After the all windows are closed No Workspace will appear on the File tag in the oject window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 10 Saving a file by overwriting Selecting the File menu gt Save saves an IDL file or and a source file are saved into the each current file by overwrit ing All the current file information including such as the layer information and the location of the caret in the Edit window is saved into the IDL file By specifying the Layer Indent area Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Source File by idl file tab the indent by layer can be replaced with the Tab code or a single byte space If the following files are active the Save As dialog box is displayed to specify the name of the file A newly created Edit window A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window A Search result display window A default file name is created based on the contents of the first li
154. ch key 3 Match Whole Word Only If this box is checked a whole word match for the search key is searched for 4 Match Case If this box is checked a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Regular Expression If this box is checked regular expressions are supported in global searching The following regular expressions are supported Expression Description Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation X or Y appears selection Same as X X appears one or more times Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Tab character t Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular
155. ch string was not found into the using Aile E ob0 test test c ENYA test testd c was finished to search ED Woo0 test test4 c was finished to search E f 4 files were searched EOF Displays the number of serach files Displays the names of search files numbers of the lines for which the replacement was performed source file names where applica ble and the contents of the lines before the replacement Table 5 1 shows the messages on the History of Replace in files window Table 5 1 Messages on the History of Replace in files Window The specified folder is invalid An attempt was An attempt was made to replace in a hidden file to An attempt was made to replace in a hidden file in a hidden file The Read Only File of xxx is invalid The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a read only attribute The Binary File of xxx is invalid The replacement cannot be performed in the specified file because of a binary file File xxx was Replaced The replacement and saving were performed in the specified file Replaced xxx Found xxx Replaced the number of the replacement Found the number of the detection File xxx was closed The specified file was closed Found xxx Found the number of the detected search character strings Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 11 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The using file xxx is skipped The specified file was skipped because it was under edi
156. ch the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Specify a project group name a project file name a project folder position a project title and the series and device name of the target device to be used The specification of the item marked with in this dialog can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected Figure 5 20 Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information Dialog Box Add Hew Project Step 178 Project Information 1 Workspace File Name l l CAVOSO test System pra Project Information pincer Grouni ene Select Real Time O5 2 tefcomple S Startup File Register Model Link Directive File Project File Hame 3 sample pri Setup Source Files Project Folder 4 EET Po Select Debugger Confirmation Project Title Oime SC CSstsSSSSS V850 Series Only 2 5 Geres Mame Device Name 6 D v50 Seres JurD 703102 Device Install This will set up the bazic information about the project Required field Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Workspace File Name The file name of the workspace currently open is displayed with an absolute path 2 Project Group Name Specify the name
157. character string 72 5 3 2 Searching for a character string upward 72 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 68 11 5 4 aoaaa AAAA AAAA a 3 CO N O o A O 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Searching for a character string downward 72 searching for a word upward 72 Searching for a word downward 73 Replacing a character string 73 Jumping to a specified line 73 Jumping to a specified line in a specified source file 73 Jumping to a marked line 73 Moving the caret to the top of line 73 Moving the caret to the end of line 73 Moving the caret to the top of file 74 Moving the caret to the end of file 74 Moving the caret to the index line 74 Moving the caret to the top layer 74 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth upward 75 Moving the caret to the layer line of the same depth downward 75 Moving the caret to the position before a jump 75 Moving the caret to the function definition line 76 searching for matching braces 76 Searching for a character string within multiple files 76 Replacing a character string within multiple files 77 searching for a character string within a project 78 Jumping to a desired line tag jump 79 Returning from atag jump 80 Continuing a tag jump downward 80 Continuing a tag jump upward 80 Moving the caret one word to the right
158. cify the same file extension of copy file The extension of the specified file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered differ Specify the same extension for the file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered E1029 The file names of copy file and register file are identical Please specify the different file name to register Copying is not possible because the specified file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered are the same Specify the same extension for the file name to be the copy source and the file name to be registered E1030 s Cannot register the file name with space character Please register the file after rename it Do you wish to continue to add source files When adding source file a file name with one byte spaces was specified s indicates the file name This mes sage is displayed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project Rename the file using a file name without one byte spaces and register it again E1031 A file name cannot contain any of the characters 2 lt gt Do you wish to continue to add source files An attempt was made to create a file with a file name that includes prohibited characters This message is dis played when multiple source files are selected and added to a project Set the file name using characters other than the displayed prohibited ones E1032 s Cannot use the network path The specified folde
159. claration more than once Yes Create a new prototype declaration No Return to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed even if the same operation is performed while PM plus is running Q2103 Do you wish to clear the undo buffer Do nothing if you select No This is to verify whether the undo buffer is cleared when creating a prototype declaration Yes Clear undo buffer and create prototype declaration No Return to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed even if the same operation is performed while PM plus is running Q2104 The read only source file s was found Do you wish to make prototypes for the source file but the read only file s A read only source file was discovered while creating a prototype declaration Yes Create a prototype declaration for a source file that is not read only No Return to the active Edit window without doing anything Q2200 PM plus has finished searching this file Do you wish to continue it from the top of file Continue it from the top of file if you select s Searching finished at the last line s indicates the key assigned to Down Yes Search from the first line No Stop searching Q2201 PM plus has finished searching this file Do you
160. closed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt alb c This means that one of a b or c will appear 4 Display Mini Dialog If this check box is checked the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box when the Find Next button is next selected default Figure 6 28 shows an image of the Replace String dialog box mini Figure 6 28 Replace String Dialog Box Mini Replace String Down Up Replace Down Replace All j iO Cancel Help Down Continues the downward search for a character string matching the specified search key Up Continues the upward search for a character string matching the specified search key Replace Down Replaces the found characters string then continues the downward search Replace All Searches for matches from the current caret position or the end of the specified edit range toward the end of the text and replaces all the character strings that match the search key Details Displays the normal Replace String dialog box in which the search conditions can be changed Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box 5 Replace All from Top of Line If this box is checked the replacement starts from the first line regardless of the position of the caret 6 This Source File Only If this box is checked only the source file to which the caret is current
161. ct Settings with a project name selected in the Project window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 259 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each tab a Project Information tab This tab displays the information on the active project and changes the project title or the device name Figure 6 45 Project Settings Dialog Box Project Information Tab Project Settings Project Information Source File Project File Hame Sa mple pr Folder ESWE50_ test Workspace File Name ES VeS0 testa mpleprvy Project Group woni Project Title 2 main Series Name Device Name 3 v850 Series JuPD7032000 Device Install Gael Hee 1 Information display area Project File Name The project file name of the active project is displayed Folder The project folder specified with the project file is displayed Workspace File Name The name of the workspace file to which the active project belongs is displayed with an absolute path Project Group The name of the project group to which the active project belongs is displayed If you wish to change the name of the project group click the right mouse button on the project group name in the Project window and select the Edit Project Group Name menu 2 Project Title The project title to be displayed in the Project window is displayed When the project title is modified here that modification is reflected in the Project wi
162. ct file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped Restrictions on the Edit window The following restrictions apply in the Edit window A maximum of 5119 characters can be entered per line The maximum allowable number of layers is 127 A line for which 128 or more layers is specified is corrected to a line with 127 layers No message is displayed The maximum allowable number of lines is 2 097 152 If an attempt is made to enter more lines a message is dis played When a file being edited is deleted a message is displayed 182 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Search result display window The Search result display window displays the result of the search performed by selecting Find in Files or Find in Project menu item Figure 6 9 Search Result Dis
163. ctronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document e NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products No license express implied or otherwise is granted under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others e Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples The incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of a customer s equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software and information e While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely To minimize risks of damage to property or injury including death to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design such as redundancy fire containment and
164. cuted with not even one project specified for building in the batch build setting After opening the Batch Build dialog box from the Batch Build Settings menu item and performing the batch build setting execute Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item again E1600 Cannot change to the folder for macro file A macro folder other than the file specified when reading saving the macro file was set Specify the set folder for the macro file E1601 Over 32 characters When registering the macro an attempt was made to set more than 32 characters for the title of the macro Set a title with fewer than 32 characters User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 399 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1610 Not enough the options d s The options set by the macro instruction are insufficient such as no specification of the line number by the speci fied line jump d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Correct the macro with the correct option setting E1611 Wrong the specific number d s A value other than a decimal number was specified for the numeric setting of a macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Specify the value with a decimal number E1612 Cannot specify these options in the same time d s Options that could not be specified simultaneously for a macro instruction were set at the same time d indicates the line number wit
165. cutes rebuilding of the projects specified in the Batch Build dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 113 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 9 Updating dependency relationship of files Selecting the Build menu gt Update dependencies updates the dependency relationship of the source files and include files and reflects the update contents in the Project window Caution If a change that affects the dependency relationship change of include file path etc has been made in the compiler option settings or assembler option settings the dependency relationship must be updated 5 7 10 Cleaning Selecting the Build menu gt Clean deletes all the intermediate files and output files generated by building projects The user is not asked for confirmation when these files are deleted 5 7 11 Editing Selecting the Build menu gt Edit enables the file selected on the Project window to be opened with the set editor If a file that cannot be edited is selected on the Project window an external editor is opened and the file is edited as a new document 5 7 12 Debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Debug starts up the debugger and downloads a load module file During downloading the name of the load module file is displayed on the Output window At this time if a program is being executed on the debugger an error will occur Therefore Select the Debug menu
166. d executes dump850 This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active Estimates the stack size executes stack850 This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active Sets up the debugger to be used and specifies the files to be down loaded Opens the Debugger Settings dialog box Registers the external tool which is started from PM plus Opens the Register External Tool dialog box Starts the registered external tool The name of this menu item is dis played as the designation at the time of registering the external tool Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Compares the selected files Opens the File Compare dialog box Starts the device file installer DFINST User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 155 156 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE PM plus Settings Eont Customize Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Operations Play Back Save the Key Operations Load the Macro File Play Back the Macro File Register the Macro Files Play Back the Register Macro Sets up the operating environment for PM plus Opens the PM plus Settings dialog box Specifies the type and size of the font used in the Edit window Opens the Font dialog box Customizes the menu bar to
167. d If it is not checked the information is saved in the registry 344 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What If this check box is checked the character string with range selection for searching is displayed when the Find String dialog box is opened If it is not checked the previously searched character string is displayed Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With If this check box is checked the character string with range selection for replacement is displayed when the Replace String dialog box is opened If it is not checked the previously replaced character string is displayed Delete the Top of Underscore _ Character when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With If this check box is checked the character string to be searched is displayed ignoring the underscore character _ at the head of a word From Top of Structure Member to Member of Caret Position when Show String Word of Caret Position to Find What Replace With If this check box is checked when a character string to be searched or replaced is displayed a words at which the caret is placed is considered to be a C language structure and that structure becomes the target character string from the start of the structure The structures are recognized by gt or Examples are shown below ocWork gt dwinfo OLE_BIT The character st
168. d Layer a w Specify The Layer Expand Layer Zi wal j i E Cancel pc ee Walid 1 127 b gt Expand Garet Line Only Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Layer menu gt Expand the Specific Layer Explanation of each area a Specify The Layer Specify the number of layers to be expanded A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified The last set ting is displayed by default When this value is specified for the first time 127 is displayed b Expand Caret Line Only When this check box is checked only the layers lower than the line at the caret position are expanded When this check box is not checked all of the specified lower layers are expanded default Function buttons Expands the specified number of layers Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 245 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution If a layer higher than the one specified is already expanded there is no change If however Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Set tings Layer tab the layer lower than the one specified are collapsed If the current caret position is lower than the specified layer the updated caret posit
169. d New Project Step 1 8 Project Information Dialog Box Add New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File Dialog Box 98 Add New Project Step 4 8 Register Mode Dialog Box Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File Dialog Box 102 Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files Dialog Box 105 Add New Project Step 7 8 Select Debugger Dialog Box 107 Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation Dialog Box 108 137 95 97 100 Window Composition of PM plus Main Window 139 162 Project Window 164 Project Window File Tab 165 Status Bar User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 17 6 18 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 Project Window Memo Tab 172 Position where a File is Dropped in a Workspace for which Project is Registered Edit Window 176 Search Result Display Window 183 Output Window 185 Open Dialog Box 187 Insert File Dialog Box 190 Open Workspace Dialog Box 193 save As Dialog Box 195 Save Source Files Options Dialog Box 197 Change Source File Name Dialog Box 199 Change Selected Source File Name Dialog Box 201 Change Selected Source File Names Dialog Box 203
170. d hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but R
171. d sets the build sequence Opens the Batch Build dialog box Direct Build Mode Selection Make the Build Mode Selection combo box of the toolbar active Build mode can be selected Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Caution If the project file to which no source file is registered is opened the build related menu items will be invalid 154 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 8 Tool menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Tool s name dump8s50 stack850 Debugger Settings Register Ex tool Start up Ex tool File Compare Device File Installer Compiler Common Options Compiler Options Assembler Options Linker Options ROM Processor Options Hesa Converter Options Section File Generator Options Static performance analyzer Options dumps stacks Debugger Settings Register Ex tool Star up eon F File Compare Device File Installer PM plus Settings Font Customize Record the Rey Operations Play Back Save the keriperaiane Load the Macro File Play Back the Macro File Register the Macro Files Play Hack the Regeer Maeno Specifies the tool options executed on PM plus Each name of the menu items depends on the tool Executes a dump comman
172. d the file is added The newly created project group name is the device series name used in the added project file Other dropped file is considered that was added as a source file and the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are all projects registered to the workspace Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 175 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Edit window is used to edit source programs Figure 6 8 Edit Window BR E V850_test test1 c Changed Hose Tests idl 7 E k E Kensa Sample testl c 7 E k Testl c 7 E J tipracma afrit t i bipracma DIH t Jai pragma EIRY E f include Testz h include Testi h E f E f LFCHAIN m_lpTop huhuhuhu LPTEXT m_ptWo t int m Chars t BOOL m Bool int nnt t a This section describes the following items Opening Character input Definitions of words Range selection Moving lines layers Copying lines layers Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button Operations performed with the right mouse button Scrolling Smart lookup function Drag and drop function Restrictions on the Edit window Opening Select the File menu gt
173. d was found in the source files of an IDL file This message is displayed when the of Display Message every Source File in the case of IDL file check box is checked s indicates the source file name Yes Execute replacement in the displayed source file No Skip replacement in the displayed source file and continue searching This message is not to be shown until new searching If this check box is checked and Yes is clicked global replacement continues without a message until the next global replacement is executed Q2206 Do you wish to replace in the using file s An attempt was made to execute global replacement in the file being edited s indicates the name of the file being edited Yes Execute replacement in the file being edited No Skip replacement in the file being edited and continue searching Q2207 s occurrence s have been replaced Do you wish to continue it from the top of file Replacement finished at the last line in character string replacement s indicates the number of items replaced Yes Continue replacement from the first line No Stop replacement Q2208 Do you wish to cancel replacement The ESC key was pressed during replacement of a character string to stop replacement Yes Stop replacement No Continue replacement User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 407 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2300 Do you wish to apply layer rule An attempt was made to open a file with layers This m
174. ding error occurred for the device file Verify that the device file is not damaged F0108 Failed to open object Make sure that this IDL file has broken An object could not be read when the file was read Verify that the IDL file is not damaged F0109 Cannot save object Memory may be not enough An object could not be saved when the file was stored The disk for storing is full so free up disk space F0110 Failed to read the macro file s Make sure that the correct path and filename given The macro file could not be read s indicates the file name Check that the specified file exists F0111 The macro file s cannot be created Make sure that the correct path and filename given or disk space The macro file could not be saved s indicates the file name Check whether the characters used in the specified file name are legal and specify legal characters If the disk is full free up memory F0112 Cannot load the IDL file of Ver3 X format Make sure that this IDL file has broken The format of the IDL file from an old version Ver 3 xx of idea L is illegal or the IDL file is damaged Check if the specified file is damaged or not F0113 s Failed to save this project file Make sure that disk space or this file has broken or this file using with other application The disk space is full the file is damaged or the file may be being used by another application s indicates the file name Check the disk capacity ver
175. do Redo Cut Copy Image Copy Paste Paste Special Delete Delete the Line Select All Grouping by Keyword Restore Color of Grouping Lines Make Function Prototypes Insert New Object Cink bject Undo Redo Cut Copy Cut for Append Copy for Append Image Copy Paste Paste Special Delete User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Ctr Erkay Chrl x Ctrl C Ctrl V Del Ctrl l Cancels the effect of an edit operation to restore the previous state Cancels the effect of an Undo operation Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them This command does not erase the pre vious contents of the clipboard but instead appends the cut potion to the end of the contents of the clipboard Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard This command does not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the cut potion to the end of the con tents of the clipboard Note that this menu item is not displayed in th
176. drop down list The contents of Open as change according to this selection c Open As Select the application of the file to be added from the drop down list The contents of Files of type change accord ing to this selection Function buttons Adds the specified files to the Project Related Files folder Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 2 1 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Other Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add any files to a project as other files Figure 6 52 Add Other Files Dialog Box Add Other Files main Ei ES a Look in E ve50 test ce Files of type Document File doc lg Cancel A This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Other Files with the Other Files folder any file selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Lookin Select the drive or folder that includes any files to be added from the drop down list Multiple files can be added 2 2 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the any files to be added Up to 259 characters can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Wk The extension of the file is doc
177. duced lt Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 22 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 22 register mode 2 26 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 26 register mode 3 932 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 32 register mode 100 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Caution If the register mode of the compiler option is changed after a new workspace is created the quasi directive indi cating the register mode in the startup file may indicate a different mode from the register mode of the other source files Therefore execute the relevant processing measure from those shown below Modify the quasi directive that indicates the register mode in the startup file as follows In 22 register mode register mode In 32 register mode Delete option reg _mode line Ignore the following warning displayed at linking Id850 W4608 input file have different register modes use rc option for more information User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 101 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Specify a link directive file The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog
178. e Return values 1 Bottom line 0 Not bottom line Caution Even if the caret line appears to be a bottom line lower layers col lapsed 1 is returned x Isendofline x Integer type variable Return values 1 The caret is at the end of the line 0 The caret is not at the end of the line x Iseof x Integer type variable Return values 1 The caret is at the end of the file 0 The caret is not at the end of the file Caution Even if the caret line appears to be a bottom line lower layers col lapsed 1 is returned x getcol x Integer type variable Return values The column number of the caret is returned Leftmost column 1 x getdispcol x Integer type variable Return values The column number of the caret is returned Leftmost column 1 x getdispline x Integer type variable Return values The line number of the caret is returned First line 1 x getabsline x Integer type variable Return values The line number of the caret is returned First line 1 x isdbcs x Integer type variable Return values 1 Two byte character 0 one byte character Inserting the current time into the time caret position Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 127 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Inserting the current date into the date caret position 5 8 16 Reading key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File opens the Load the Macro Fi
179. e dialog box Figure 6 35 Replace in Files Dialog Box Replace in Files fa Find What main Replace With main btr Replace b Of Type fr idl Replace Whe File Folder IE l Replace All W Look in Subfolders W Match Gase Close c Match Whole Word Only mM Regular Expression eras wee Display Message every Source File Td ee col ie Figure 6 36 Replace in Files Dialog Box during Replacement Replace in Files Find What main j Replace With main btr ae Of Type idl I Replace This File Folder ES V850 test a OAE Replace All Me Loot m subfolders je Hatch mase Cancel P Match nhale mard riy M Reeuler Expression 7 l Rie E Help Display hessaee Even souree aile Vv i the tase of LOI Tle test adl This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution 240 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Select the Find menu gt Replace in Files Select the Replace in Files button on the tool bar Explanation of each area a Character strings specification area 1 Find What This area specifies the character string to be replaced A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for searching is displayed If there is no
180. e gt filename Specify the file name with full path Open workspace Openworkspace lt filename gt filename Specify the file name with full path Close workspace closeworkspace nosave Close closefile nosave nosave Closes the edited file without saving Save As saveas lt filename gt makesource notdevide replace crlf lf cr sjis eucljis unicode filename Specify the file name with full path makesource Creates a source file notdivide Does not divide the source file replace Overwrites without displaying message to verify crif Saves a line feed code as CR LF If Saves a line feed code as LF cr Saves a line feed code as CR sjis Saves as Shift JIS code euc Saves as EUC code jis Saves as JIS code Unicode Saves as Unicode Table 5 3 Command Format for Key Board Macro Edit menu Contents Command Format Undo undo Cut Combination of copy command and delete command User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 119 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Delete delete Delete the Word deleteword lt all gt all Required to distinguish from Delete to the End of Word Grouping by Keyword grouping lt character string to be searche gt and or color delete none coloronly undocolor window lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with and AND search or OR search matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Disti
181. e searched with word Searches for word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression source Displays the source file name as well findalllayer Displays all searched files with layers foundlayer Displays the files in which character strings are found with lay ers foundnotlayer Displays the files in which character strings are found with out layers autoselect Detects automatically sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Copy for Append copyforappend Cut for Append cutforappend Find in Project findinproject Table 5 5 Command Format for Key Board Macro Layer menu Contents Command Format Promote onelevelup Expand the Specific Layer expandspecified caret caret Limits the action to those layers below the caret position Collapse the Specific Layer collapsespecified caret caret Limits the action to those layers below the caret position 122 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Table 5 6 Command Format for Key Board Macro jump related Contents Command Format To the Top of Line topofline To the End of Line endofline Mark Jump Adding the current addmark caret position as a marked line Mark Jump Jumping to a marked markjump lt mark number gt line
182. e a new workspace and its project the following wizard format dialog boxes are displayed Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box New Workspace Step 4 8 Register Mode dialog box New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box New Workspace Step 7 8 Select Debugger dialog box New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box Clicking the Finish button in the dialog box at the last step New Workspace Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box causes a make file to be created automatically Refer to the 5 6 10 Exporting a make file for details of make file cre ation User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 39 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The dialog boxes to be displayed differ depending on the selection The wizard flow of each selection is shown below Figure 5 1 Wizard Flow for Creating New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information Yes Check to Create Blank Workspace option No No Specification of V850 series and non library Yes Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Step 3 8 Startup File Check to Use the Sample file No option Yes Step 4 8 Register Mode Step
183. e check box is cleared then checked again the previous file name for the file not to be divided is displayed Note that when the Edit window is closed the name becomes invalid c Remove the Source File before renamed Fu This check box specifies whether the file with original name is deleted when the source file name is changed Checked Deletes the file with the original name Not checked Remains the file with the original name nction buttons Change File Names Opens the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box when a single source file name is selected Opens the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box when multiple file names are selected 200 Select All Selects all files listed in Source File Names User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Selected Source File Name dialog box This dialog box is used to rename the source file selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Figure 6 17 Change Selected Source File Name Dialog Box Ghanee Selected Source File Name x a File Name Testi E Cancel Folder a E C Comment Mark f Double Slash fe AR k IC C Semicolon C sharp Fl C Original Mark Setting How File Mame Test0001 c Title Pe Test idi a This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select Change File Names with a single so
184. e default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard exactly as they are displayed on the screen Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the caret position Inserts the contents of the clipboard by the specified format at the caret position Deletes the character string or the lines selected with the range selec tion 143 144 Delete the Word Delete to the End of Word Delete the Line Deleting to the Top of Line Delete to the End of Line Select to the Word Select to the Top of Word Select to the End of Word Select to the Top of Line Select to the End of Line Select All Grouping by Keyword Restore Color of Grouping Lines Make Function Prototypes Insert New Object CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Deletes a single word at the caret position Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Deletes the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the right of the caret position Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Deletes a single line at the caret
185. e development process can be performed more easily by linking with a source management tool Linking with a source analysis tool Quality management of the source program in the software development process can be performed more easily by linking with a commercial source analysis tool Supporting ToolLink Communication with ToolLink support tools is easily achieved through supporting ToolLink Correspondence of comments with specification PM plus supports a function that is effective in adjustment of specification at the processes of its review idea pro cessor function This makes it possible to reflect the adjusted contents to a source program as comments User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 3 Positioning of PM plus Figure 1 2 shows the relationship between the software used for program development and PM plus Figure 1 2 Relationship between Software for Program Development and PM plus Product planning PM plus System design Hardware design Software design Real time OS Build Structured assembler Note 1 Compilling woa a Assembling ROMi ization processor Note 1 Hex converter Note 2 Object converter Note 1 No Bobs IC Sate sito gt No Integrated debugger Performance analyzer Performance AnalysisTuning Tool System debugging System evaluation Commercialization Note 1 78K Series only Note 2 V850 Series only 26 User s Manu
186. e dis played in the default condition Source Files c h asm s Include Files h inc idea L Files idl Text Files txt All Files c Create the Source Files Checked A source file is also created when the IDL file is saved In this case the Change Source File Name and Source File Name Option buttons become valid Not checked Only the IDL file is saved and no source file is created In this case the Change Source File Name and Source File Name Option buttons become invalid Note that if the Search result display window is active this check box is always invalid d CR Code This setting is valid when a file is saved in text file format If a text file that has already been read is specified the linefeed code when the file was read is displayed The linefeed code that can be saved are as follows MS Windows CR LF Linefeed code has 2 bytes CR code and LF code UNIX OS LF Linefeed code LF code Mac OS CR Linefeed code CR code Function buttons Saves the file with the specified name Change Source File Name Opens the Change Source File Names dialog box in which the source file name and the comment mark can be changed Source File Name Option Opens the Save Source Files Options dialog box in which the options for the source file to be created can be set 196 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save Source Files Options dialog b
187. e drop location If the file is dropped at 2 the file is added as a source file treating that project as the addition target project since there is one project affiliated with the project group at the drop location If the file is dropped at 3 the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are all projects registered to the workspace Multiple files can be dropped Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box When dropping a workspace file and a file other than the workspace file together Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Opens other files that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened When dropping a project file and a file other than the project file together The operation differs depending on where the file was dropped If the file is dropped at 1 or 2 a project is added to the project group at the drop location Other dropped file is considered that was added as a source file and the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added If the project file is dropped at 3 a newly project group is created an
188. e file This option is enabled if Make header file of Function Prototypes is selected When a header file is newly cre ated the include statement set header file name is added to the top of each first layer source file Function buttons Generates the prototype declaration of a function in the specified way Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution In the following cases a prototype declaration may not be created correctly If a created prototype declaration is copied and pasted the pasted prototype declaration is not updated If the prototype declaration created in the first layer is brought to a lower layer the prototype declaration created initially becomes a different declaration When a prototype declaration is created undo buffer is cleared Therefore the original state cannot be restored 218 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE A function name cannot be recognized with the control instructions indicated below When the function name differs according to the value of ifdef void Hifdef ENGLISH FncEng Helse Fncdapan Hendi f Lint Cnt int Made 1 When function name extends over 2 lines with void Function Name Lint Cnt int Made 1 When variable declaration is performed between function name and Hifdef ENGLISH int maint argc arev J int argc char arevL
189. e folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 294 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Status dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS status command for the selected file and display the file s status in the Out put window Figure 6 64 CVS Status Dialog Box CVS Status E4 a File ES W860 test testl c Cancel 6 Gommand Caf Filenames Te E evs exe status Sif ae This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Status Explanation of each area a File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file b Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are st
190. e font on the Edit window can be selected Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 117 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 11 Customizing settings Selecting the Tool menu gt Customize opens Customize dialog box in which each setting can be customized The following settings are available Shortcut keys assigned to each menu Menu items to be displayed Toolbar items to be displayed Right mouse button menu items and shortcut menu items Highlight display and color 5 8 12 Recording key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Record the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key Operations starts and stops record ing of the key operations While key operations are not being recorded this menu item is Record the Key Operations and selecting this menu item starts recording of the key operations While key operations are not being recorded this menu item is Record the Key Operations and selecting this menu item starts recording of the key operations While key operations are being recorded Recording is displayed on the window title 5 8 13 Playing back key operations Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back plays back the recorded key operations If this menu item is selected during recording the recording stops and the operations start to be played back If the prebious key operation is read by selecting the Tool menu gt Load the Macro File that key operation is played back 5 8 14 Saving key o
191. e is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop build select the Build menu gt Stop Build 5 7 2 Rebuilding and Debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Rebuild and Debug executes batch processing from rebuild to debug for the active project With Build and Debug menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their dependent files have been scanned whereas with Rebuild and Debug menu item all the source files are built unconditionally If rebuild ends correctly the debugger starts up automatically and loads the load module file created by rebuild process ing However if a program is under execution on the debugger an error will occur When an error occurs during rebuild the processing stops and the debugger does not start up The messages output from the language processing tools during build are output to a log file The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop rebuild select the Build menu gt Stop Build 5 7 3 Compiling Selecting the Build menu gt Compile executes a language tool assembler C compiler for the selected file on the Project window Compile is a part of Build except that object file linking is not executed within Compile Execution of Compile will also start up the assembler for the assembler source code The messages output form the language
192. e not replaced with Tab codes but the lines of the third and subsequent layers are replaced with Tab codes User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 197 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File If this check box is checked Tab codes are replaced with the number of space codes specified with Indent Tab Characters on the View tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box A two byte space is replaced with two one byte Space codes Function buttons Saves the file with the specified options Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 198 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to change the name of the source file to be created from an IDL file being edited to a specified file name Figure 6 16 Change Source File Name Dialog Box lig Change Source File Names a Source File Names Title EA WASO test Test0001 c 2 Testid Cancel Help Change File Names select All b ef Not Divide the Source File c Remove the Source File before renamed This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Change Source File Name Select the File menu gt Save As and click the Change Source File Name button User s Ma
193. e right mouse button and use the Edit Project Group Name menu that is displayed 5 6 17 Changing a project title To change the project title select the project title on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Edit Project Title menu that is displayed The project title can also be changed with the Project menu gt Project Settings 5 6 18 Moving a project To move the project to another project group follow the procedure shown below on the Project window 1 Select the name of the project title to be moved click the right mouse button and delete the project using the Delete Project menu 2 Select the name of the project group to which the project is to be moved click the right mouse button and insert the deleted project using the Insert Project menu User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 111 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 Build Functions 5 7 1 Building and Debugging Selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug executes batch processing from build to debug for the active project If build ends correctly the debugger starts up automatically and loads the load module file created by build processing However if a program is under execution on the debugger an error will occur When an error occurs during build the pro cessing stops and the debugger does not start up The messages output from the language processing tools during build are output to a log file The log fil
194. eating a new workspace is displayed If the contents shown in this dialog box are correct click the Finish button to terminate this wizard Then PM plus generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the information dis played Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 7 Opening a workspace Selecting File menu gt Open Workspace or moving the workspace file using a drag and drop operation opens a workspace Selecting the File menu gt Open Workspace displays the Open Workspace dialog box and opens the selected workspace file prw on the Project window At this time closes the currently opened workspace file and project file If a project file prj rather than a workspace file is specified a message is displayed after which the prw file corresponding to prj is opened At this time the project file prj of PM V3 xx format can also be specified in this dialog box Refer to the 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Project manager V3 xx If a workspace file is is dragged to the main frame Edit window Search result display window Output window and Project window opens the workspace file that was dropped At this time closes the currently opened workspace file Ifa project file prj rather than a workspace file is moved using a drag and drop operation a prw file corresponding to prj is opened If an atte
195. ect Settings later Back Next gt Cancel Help User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 53 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Source File Name The names of the source files to be registered into the project are displayed in the source file list box The source files are registered to the project file in the order currently shown in this list box In addition the build processing are performed in the registered order Caution If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible If after a source file is added the series name is changed by returning to the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box files among the previously added file other than those with extensions corresponding to the series after the change are also displayed in the source file list box In this case delete these source files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box to specify the source code files to be registered to the project Up to 2 048 source files can be registered per project The extension of source code file differs depending on the series name registered to the project Remove Removes the selected file from the source file list box By selecting a file name while holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key multiple source file names can be selected at once The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is s
196. ect the error F0401 A line has too many characters in make file The characters in one line after the macro was expanded in a make file exceeded 5120 Set 5120 or fewer characters per line description FO600 s The file cannot be found Please build your program after setting output assembler source of compile option The assembler file could not be found when the stack850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indi cates the assembler file name Specify the assembler source output using a compiler option execute build and try again F0601 sThe object file was required in order to execute the dump850 command Please execute build to generate the object file The object file could not be found when the dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the object file name Execute build generate an object file and try again FO602 Failed to remove the file Make sure that this file is read only or the other process using this file The displayed file could not be deleted when the stack850 command or dump850 command on the Tool menu was executed s indicates the name of the file that could not be deleted Check if the displayed file is read only or if it is being used by another application If it is read only clear it and try again If it is being used by another application close the application and try again FO603 s Failed to rename the filename Make sure that other process using this file
197. ed Files o he Other Files A 6 ServoLibrary vee J Source Files FD Include Files a 0 Project Related Files A E main H E Source Files H E Include Files th J Project Related Files When dropping a workspace file prw extension The operation is the same regardless of where the file is dropped Closes the workspace and then opens the work space that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together 174 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When dropping a project file prj extension The operation differs depending on where the file was dropped If the project file is dropped at 1 or 2 a project is added to the project group at the drop location If the project file is dropped at 3 a newly project group is created and the file is added The newly created project group name is the device series name used in the added project file Multiple files can be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Operation is performed considering that a source file was added The operation differs depending on where the file was dropped If the file is dropped at 1 the Select Project dialog box is displayed to select the project to which the source file is added The projects that can be selected are projects affiliated with the project group at th
198. ed by clicking the Set Color button Underline Sets the underline color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to under line The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button CR and EOF Sets the linefeed code and EOF color of the Edit window The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to CR and EOF The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button ReadOnly Source File Sets the character color of the source files set as read only in the IDL files The currently set color is displayed in the text box next to ReadOnly Source File The color can be changed by clicking the Set Color button 8 Appear Flat Toolbar If this check box is checked the toolbar is displayed flat default 340 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Function buttons Button Function Set Color Opens the Color dialog box to select the color OK Enables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box j Layer tab This tab is used to make settings related to layers Figure 6 90 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Layer Tab PH plus Settings Workspace l External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File Window Path Edt View Layer Scrol Find Replace Layer Mark at Top of Line 3 Sr Line wit
199. ed to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 288 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Update dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS update command for the selected file and acquire files registered in the repository The result is displayed on the Output window Figure 6 61 CVS Update Dialog Box CVS Update a F ile E V850_test testl c Cancel b Command Mf Filenames TE E evsexe update 4 a This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Update Explanation of each area a File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 289 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command op
200. elected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Removes all the source files from the source file list box The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Moves the selected file up within the source file list box Down Moves the selected file down within the source file list box Remove All a 54 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 7 8 Select Debugger dialog box Select the debugger which debug the project to be created newly The specification of the item marked with in this dialog can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected The debugger specified with this dialog box can be changed after exiting this wizard Figure 5 8 New Workspace Step 7 8 Select Debugger Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 778 Select Debugger Please select the Debugger 1 Workspace Information Debugger T 2 Select Real Time 0S 1 E ystem Simulator 3 Startup File 4 Register Model B Link Directive File 6 Setup Source Files File name 2 gt ESNECToolsa2 BIN SME5D32 EXE r Select Debugger Option 6 Confirmation 3 H VE50 Series Only 2 5 fou can change the selected Debugger using Tool gt Select Debugger Required field
201. elp 1 Compare Time Stamp of Source Files as Open idl File If this check box is checked the time stamps of the IDL file and source file are compared when the IDL file is opened default The operation to be performed if the time stamps are different is also selected here Always Open New Files The file with the later time stamp is always read Display Message If Source Files Updated A message is displayed when the source file is newer than the IDL file If the OK button is clicked in this mes sage dialog box the source file is read instead of the first layer corresponding to the file When read the layer option settings is applied to the file at the that time If the No button is clicked the IDL file is read The source file is not updated If Apply to all update files is checked all source files found subsequently later are updated without any mes sages being displayed 332 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Layer Option as Update This area sets the layer when the source file is read Not Apply Layers When a new source file is read it is read again without layer Recover Layers When a new source file is read the layer set in the previous source file is restored default Follow Layer Rule When a new source file is read the layer rule is applied to the file 3 Layer Indent No Replace When a new source file is saved the indent of layer is not replaced default
202. en character strings the oldest one will be deleted The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Posi tion to Find What on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab b Of Type This area specifies the name of the file to be searched The wild card can also be used for file names Multiple file names can be specified by separating them with a semi colon Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Up to 10 file names can be stored c Folder This area specifies the folder to be searched A desired folder can be directly input or can be changed by clicking the button to open the Select Folder dialog box Figure 6 34 shows an image of the Select Folder dialog box Figure 6 34 Select Folder Dialog Box Select Folder Ei Folder B E Windows 98 i H E Kc ns Al Local ey My Documents cf My Download Files a Proeram Files Cancel After selecting a folder in this dialog box clicking the OK button can be specify the folder If the Cancel button is clicked a folder cannot be selected d Search options area 1 Search Active Window Only If this button is checked only the file being edited is searched default Accordingly Of Type Folder and Look in Subfolders are disabled 236 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Look in Subfolders If this button i
203. en the mouse is double clicked on the Edit window 3 Image Copy This area is used to select whether a layer is replaced by a space or a Tab when an image is copied Convert Indent to Tab The layer is replaced be a Tab Convert Indent to Space The layer is replaced be a space default 4 Object Disable object resize If this check box is checked the size of an object pasted in a document cannot be changed default Keep object when execute paste command If this check box is checked an object is pasted as an object even if it can be pasted as text To paste it as text use the Paste Special menu item 5 Smart Look up Function Use If this check box is checked the smart lookup function can be used Function List display If this check box is checked the candidate function names with the corresponding number of the characters are displayed Display the List at more than xxx character s Sets the number of the characters at which the candidate functions are displayed 1 to 30 can be selected The default number is 5 User Setup List display If this check box is checked character strings other than function names can be added to the candidate list by setting an arbitrary keyword The keyword can be set by clicking the User Setting button 338 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Function buttons Button Function User Setting Opens the User Setting dialog box K En
204. enesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office e
205. ening a workspace file Source Files c cpp asm s Include Files h inc idea L Files idl Text Files txt All Files File types user specified extension etc can be added with the Tool menu gt Customize The specified file is inserted applying a specified layer rule If Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s is checked on the File tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box this check box is checked automatically and dimmed The Layer Rule button can only be valid when Apply Layer Rule check box is checked Example Opening a file without checking the check box if value 0 123 pos else if walue 0 456 p else p l Hl Opening a file with checking the check box aie a a ie if value 0 123 PHO i else if walue O02454 p l i elze p l User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 191 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Inserts the contents of the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Layer Rule Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box In the Set Layer Rule dialog box the layer rule to be applied when reading a file can be set 192 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open Workspace dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified workspace file If a workspace file or a project file is already opened
206. enu Function buttons Function Opens the Edit User keyword dialog box Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Does not enable the specified items and closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 35 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit User keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords defined by the user to highlight arbitrary character strings The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set The keywords set in this dialog box can be saved as a keyword file A keyword file is a text file and can be edited easily with an arbitrary editor Figure 6 101 Edit User keyword Dialog Box Edit User keyword a Keywords keyword File Tnitialize Open UP Page 1 2 gt gt UND ae Po oo ee oo ee ooo ooo ooo ee ooo ooo oo o ooo Tooo o o ooo ooo oo o o Cancel C U a ee Hep This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the User Keywords button on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab 358 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Keywords Keywords is set by direct input Up to 64 keywords with 32 or fewer one byte characters can be set Keyword File Displays the keyword file name currently read Function buttons Displays the previous pa
207. enu gt To the Index Line moves the caret to the top of the index line at the current caret position line with a layer higher by one When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top of the index line When this check box is not checked if range selection has been performed the range from the position where range selection started to the index line is re selected If however a layer higher than that of the line where the range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the index line the range up to the line immediately before the index line is re selected because that higher layer cannot be selected by range selection 5 3 15 Moving the caret to the top layer Selecting the Find menu gt To the Top Layer at caret moves the caret to the top layer line at the caret position When Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves to the top layer at the caret position If however a layer higher than that of the line where range selection started exists between the range selection start position and the top layer at the caret position the range immediately before that higher layer line is re selected
208. ep 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Specify a link directive file The specified link directive file is registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Figure 5 6 New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 5 6 LinkDwective File Please specify the Link Directive File 1 Workspace Information 2 Select Real Time O5 1 Memon Usage G Use Internal memory orly C Use External memory 3 Startup File 4 Register Mode 2 gt Use the Existing file 5 Link Directive File 3 Copy and Use the Existing file E Setup Source Files Eopp tron Create and Use the Sample file ARETE On EO 0000000000000000 000000000000000 00000000000 0000o Brawee r Select Debugger ae 6 Confirmation 4 C DoNot specify now 1 V850 Series Only 2 5 The Link Directive File Name to register 5 C AVS850_test System dir File Name The link directive file describes information about the allocation of program code and data ln case of using the sample file Please customize it according as your target If you map the external ROM to the internal ROM area in ROM less mode please select use intemal memor only The specihed link directive file i registered to the Project Related Files B
209. er s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 21 List No 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 9 9 5 6 5 7 5 8 9 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 7 1 B 1 22 LIST OF TABLES Title and Page Messages on the History of Replace in files Window 77 Command Format for Key Board Macro File menu 119 Command Format for Key Board Macro Edit menu 119 Command Format for Key Board Macro Find menu 120 Command Format for Key Board Macro Layer menu 122 La Command Format for Key Board Macro jump related 123 Command Format for Key Board Macro Help menu 123 Command Format for Key Board Macro no menu 124 Command Format for Key Board Macro control command related 125 Window Dialog Box List 133 Standard Bar 159 Build Bar 160 Option Bar 78K Series 161 Option Bar V850 Series 161 The Meaning of each Message Type 382 Quantitative Limit List 420 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 1 Overview The project manager PM plus is an integrated development environment platform that is used to efficiently develop user programs for NEC Electronics 8 16 bit microcontrollers for embedded control the 78K Series and NEC Electronics 32 bit microcontrollers for embedded control the V850 Series A series of operations in user program development can be performed from PM plus such as editor startup builder star tup and debugger startup PM plus is a product that integrates a pr
210. er a project group select a project title in the Project window delete the registered project by clicking the right mouse button and executing Delete Project and then transfer the project to the new location by executing Insert Project from the Project menu User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 26 amp CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Insert Project dialog box This dialog box is used to insert an existing project into a project group The project added here will be the active project Figure 6 47 Insert Project Dialog Box a Look in E YASO test Al ce a ButtonControl pr b l Files of type Project File pry Cancel Help C Project Group Name fvas50 Z This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Project menu gt Insert Project Select the right mouse button menu gt Insert Project with a project group name selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the project file to be inserted from the drop down list b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the project file to be inserted The project file extension is prj Files with any other exten sions cannot be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 264 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFE
211. er or footer to be printed This dialog box is used to collect lines including a specified character string and display the collected results at the top of the Edit window In the collected results the search key is dis Grouping by Keyword dialog box played in the first layer and the collected lines are displayed in the second layer Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box This dialog box is used to automatically generate the prototype declaration of a function User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 133 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Contents Window Name Dialog Box Name Find String dialog box This dialog box is used to find a character string Replace String dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string Jump to Specified Line dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destina tion line number in the current file Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box Mark Jump dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the current caret position as a mark or to make a jump to a marked line Find in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to search through multiple files in a specified folder for a character string Replace in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string in multiple files in a specified folder Expand to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to expand specified layers Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box
212. er string and Untitled x on the title BF include Untitled4 gt EYO test testl c was finished to search t t ES VS50 test testi cl j include Test2 h t EYO test testi cl9 include Testi h 50 test test c was finished to search t t ENYD test test2 cl4 include Test2 h t E VS50 test test2 clhj include Testi h t ES VO50 test test2 clbj include Test3 h SV G60 test testd c was finished to t ENYD test test3 cl4 include t ES VO50 test test3d clhj include t EYO test testd clbj include t E VG50 test testd cl include 3 files were searched EOF This menu item is effective when a project file is open In the case of a search for a character string at the caret position this menu item cannot be selected if the caret is positioned to a character other than an alphanumeric character or _ In the case of a search for a character string selected with range selection this menu item cannot be selected if lines are selected with range selection Up to 5119 characters are displayed as the search results in the format of file name number of the line on which the character string is found contents of the line on which character string is found Note that 5120 or more char acter cannot be displayed User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The search can be interrupted by pressing the ESC key The search conditions are as specified in the Find in Fi
213. er string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when the search does not end at the top of bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret Replace replace lt character string before replacement gt lt character string after replacement gt word matchcase zen special loop askloop frombot tom Source all lt character string before replacement gt Specify the character string before replacement with lt character string after replacement gt Specify the character string after replacement with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when search does not end at the top or bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret all Replace all when omitted same as the operation of Replace button Find in Files When searching grepfile lt character string to be searched gt l
214. ere are displayed as buttons on the external toolbar b Detail The information on the external tool selected in Menu List is displayed here Function buttons Ad Opens the Select External Tool dialog box for registering external tools The added tool is displayed at the end of Menu List Up to 10 external tools can be registered Therefore if 10 external tools are already set this button is dimmed d Opens the External Tool Browse dialog box for the selected tool in Menu List K Caution The external tools are common setting item in PM plus They cannot be set in project units User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 317 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a external tool to be used Figure 6 77 Select External Tool Dialog Box Select External Tool a eFile Name OWINDOWS Notepadexe Browse b Fara meter Cancel Help c gt Tool Folder fONWINDOWS d Fr tenu String Notepad e Tool tip String Notepad f Status bar String Start Notepad This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Add button in the Register External Tool dialog box Select the Edit button in the Register External Tool dialog box Explanation of each area a File Name Specify the name of the execution fi
215. ers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand the Specific Layer opens the Expand to Specified Layer dialog box to expand a specified number of layers A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified in this dialog box The last setting is displayed in the default con dition When this value is specified for the first time 127 is displayed 5 4 10 Collapsing a specified number of layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse the Specific Layer opens the Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box to col lapse a specified number of layers A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified in this dialog box The last setting is displayed in the default con dition When this value is specified for the first time 1 is displayed User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 85 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 11 Displaying the top layer only Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 1 collapses lower layers and displays the top layer only If the caret is positioned to a layer other than the top layer it will be positioned to the top layer Note that Show Index 1 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 12 Displaying the first and second layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 2 collapses the third and subsequent layers and displays the first and sec ond layers If the caret is pos
216. es the layer of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection by one as well as the layers of its lower layer lines if any Figure 5 14 Promoting Layers Func LONG IWo I aoe int mRet nmbnt I L nRet forfnRet 0 nRet lt amp return nRet a CN int Funes LONG INo kf E p H int mRet nnt for nRet 0 nRet 5 nRett t f Select the Layer menu gt Promote j seturi nper If a line without lower layers the layer mark at the top of the line is changed to the Line with Lower Layer mark The layer mark can be specified with the Layer Mark at Top of Line area on the Tool menu gt PM Setting Layer tab 5 4 2 Demoting Layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Demote demotes the layer of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection by one as well as the layers of its lower layer lines if any Figure 5 15 Demoting Layer int Funes LONG INol I L int mRet nnt forinRet 0 nRet 5 mRettt f return nRet Func LONG INo I re SL p e j int nRet nnt for nRet 0 nRet lt E nRet f Select the Layer menu gt Demote H return nfet If a line with lower layers the layer mark at the top of the line is changed to the Line with Lower Layer mark The layer mark can be specified with the Laye
217. es the window active 376 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Makes the selected window active Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Close Window s Closes the selected window s Multiple windows can be closed at a time Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 377 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Shortcut List dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of the shortcut keys set in PM plus Figure 6 111 Shortcut List Dialog Box Shortcut List a Shortcut List z Close shortcut Mew trit Operi Ctrl C Help Insert file Glose Mew Workspace Open Workspace save Workspace Close Workspace aye Ctr l Save AS nave All Save All Changed Files nave and Close All CiInece All This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Help menu gt Shortcut List Explanation of each area a Shortcut List This area displays a list of the shortcut keys currently set in PM plus If a shortcut key is customized on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab the contents are reflected on this list 378 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 379 CHAPTER 6 WIN
218. essage is displayed when the Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s check box on the File tab under PM plus Settings on the Tool menu is checked The This message is not to be shown until restart check box is valid only when Yes is selected Yes Open the file with layers No Open the file without layers Q2301 Do you wish to clear the undo buffer Do nothing if you select No This is to verify whether the undo buffer is cleared when applying layer rule to a file Yes Clear the undo buffer No Return to the active Edit window without doing anything This message is not to be shown until restart By checking this check box this message is not displayed even if the same operation is performed while PM plus is running Q2400 s has already set Do you wish to change a setting Now s2 After s3 When adding a project related file an attempt was made to add a file type that has already been set The type of file startup file etc to be set is displayed to s1 the currently set file name is set to s2 and the file name to be newly set is set to s3 Select Yes to change the setting and No to not change the setting Yes Change the setting and return to the Project window No Return to the Project window without changing the setting Q2401 s This project file was generated by a previous version of Project Manager PM plus converts to the new for mat An attempt was made to open a project file crea
219. ether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that One Character Right menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 81 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 33 Moving the caret one character to the left Selecting the Find menu gt One Character Left moves the caret one character to the left If range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that One Character Left menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 34 Making the Search Character String Specification combo box active Selecting Find menu gt Direct Search makes the Search Character String Specification combo box of the toolbar active After directly inputting the character string to be searched press the Enter key to search the specified character string in the currently active Edit window 82 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 Layer Management 5 4 1 Promoting layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Promote promot
220. eywords Setup File hitialize Open lt P Page 1 2 gt gt UND ane Brama fiasm fierdasm a Es es ee rs o o ee O Cancel EE U a ee Hep This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the User Setting button on the Edit tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box 346 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Keywords Keywords is set by direct input Up to 64 keywords can be set Setup File Displays the name of the read setting file Function buttons Displays the previous page 0 Displays the next page Deletes all the set keywords If there were any setting files being read that file name is cleared Open Opens the Open Keyword File dialog box and reads the specified setting file At this time the previous keyword is deleted If there are over 65 keywords in the setting file the 65th and subsequent keywords are ignored Opens the Save Keyword File dialog box and saves the keywords in a setting file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 347 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Font dialog box This dialog box is used to select the type and size of characters to be displayed in the Edit window Figure 6 94 Font Dialog Box Courter Hew Fined ys 15 F Forte
221. f is not hierarchically organized Use elif This area displays samples of how the items currently selected by Apply Layer Rule are subjected to the layer rule c Apply Layer Rule only the Range You Selected This check box is displayed only if this dialog is opened by selection the Layer menu gt Apply Layer Rule This check box becomes valid when the Apply Layer Rule menu item is performed with a range selection in the Edit window If this check box is checked the layer rule is applied to the specified range only Function buttons Function Applies the layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 249 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution When the layer rule is applied the undo buffer is cleared This means that the status existing prior to applying the layer rule cannot be restored If Apply Layer Rule only to the Range You Selected check box is checked the following caution is required If the range selection does not extend from following an instruction to the layer rule is not applied 1 void Set Statusint State 2i 3 if State gt O50 77 The if statement is subjected to the layer rule if the specified edit range extends up to the fitth line 4 m_nState State 5 o 6 alse i State OFF If the range selection does not cover the s
222. f the active Edit window without opening the Print dialog box 5 1 22 History of files The bottom of the File menu displays the names of the ten most recently edited saved files Selecting any one of them causes the Edit window for that file to open 5 1 23 History of workspaces The bottom of the File menu displays the names of the ten most recently opened workspace files or project files 5 1 24 Exiting PM plus To exit the PM plus select File menu gt Exit PM plus or the Close button For any window that has been edited a message for confirming whether to save the changes is displayed then the PM plus is exited User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 65 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 Edit Functions 5 2 1 Canceling an edit operation Selecting the Edit menu gt Undo cancels the effect of an edit operation and restores the previous state Up to 1 024 edit operations can be undone Undo is effective for the following edit operations Entry of characters into the Edit window The key input is canceled for each one character including the TAB DEL BS and ENTER key File gt Insert file Edit gt Cut Edit gt Paste Edit gt Paste Special Edit gt Delete Edit gt Delete the Line Edit gt Insert New Object Replacement of a character string using Find gt Replace except Replace All Copying of lines by dragging of mouse
223. fa aBbYy AZ This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Font Explanation of each area a Font Specify a desired font b Size Specify a desired size c Sample This area displays the sample characters of the selected font and size 348 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Default Registers the font specified here as the default font to be used when displaying a new Edit window or when loading a file Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 349 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Customize dialog box This dialog box is used to set the following options The option settings are performed on the following tabs a Keyboard tab b Menu tab c Toolbar tab d User Menu tab e Keyword tab Figure 6 95 Customize Dialog Box New Workspace Open Workspace nave Workspace Close Workspace aye ave S ave 4 Press new shortcut key cael Hee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each tab Opening Select the Tool menu gt Customize 350 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each tab a Ke
224. fer to 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace 5 6 2 Selecting active project Selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project displays the Select Active Project dialog box in which the active project can be selected The active project means the project to be built or debugged 90 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace Selecting the Project menu gt Add New Project can be added a new project to a workspace A new project can also be added by selecting a project group on the Project window clicking the right mouse button and selecting Add New Project In order to add a new project to the workspace currently open the following wizard format dialog boxes are displayed Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Add New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Add New Project Step 4 8 Register Mode dialog box Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Add New Project Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box Add New Project Step 7 8 Select Debugger dialog box Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation dialog box Clicking the Finish button in the dialog box at the last step Add New Project Step 8 8 Confirmation di
225. function is selected in Func tion area This is the same as double clicking a function name This button is invalid if a function name is not selected in Function area Displays in the ascending order the functions of each source file displayed in the order in which they have been searched from the beginning of the Edit window If the functions are displayed in the ascending order they are displayed in the order in which they have been searched By default they are displayed in the order in which they have been searched B Displays the Save the Function List dialog box and a function list can be saved into a file E Closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box b Function This area displays a list of the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window If this dialog box is opened or made active with a range selection placed on the character string of a function name in the Edit window the specified function name is selected Double clicking the left mouse button or clicking the jump button after selecting a function name in Function area jumps to the function definition line in the Edit window Note that because this area lists the functions in the active Edit window when multiple Edit windows are open the contents of the function list will be update each time the window focus is moved 252 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution The function name is not recogn
226. g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly O times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of a To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c xly Si
227. g box Explanation of each area a Font and Size Font name Displays the font type under currently set Select a desired font type by the scroll bar Size Displays the font size under currently set Select a desired font size by the scroll bar b Sample Displays sample characters in the selected font and size User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 209 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Enables the specified font and size Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 210 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Set Header Footer dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the contents of the header or footer to be printed Figure 6 22 Set Header Footer Dialog Box Set Header Footer x Header Header in Cancel Header Font Oac sl Font Arial po Position p Size 10 point Draw a Line Below Header Draw a Fieaiie and Path Change Header Font Draw a Source Filename and Path b Footer Footer Footer Font m o Bs Font Arial Position LEFT Size 10 point Draw a Line Below Footer Draw a Filename and Path Change Footer Fort Draw a Source Filename and Path This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Header Footer button in the Print dialog box Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 211
228. ge 0 Displays the next page Deletes all the set keywords If there were any setting files being read that file name is cleared Open Opens the Open Keyword File dialog box and reads the specified setting file At this time the previous keyword is deleted If there are over 65 keywords in the setting file the 65th and subsequent keywords are ignored Opens the Save Keyword File dialog box and saves the keywords in a setting file SOK Sets the user keywords Does not enable the specified items and closes the dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 359 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords for highlighting of reserved words in C language The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set Figure 6 102 Edit C Language s reserve words Dialog Box Edit Language s reserve words a keywords hitialize gE Page 1 2 gt gt th This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Reserve Words button on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab Explanation of each area a Keywords Keywords is set by direct input Up to 64 keywords with 32 or fewer one byte characters can be set 360 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Displays t
229. ge Source File Names When tag jumping from the Output window to the first error line in the source file the comment symbols associated with the IDL file were not set in the first line in the source file Using Change Source File Name set the same mark for the comment in the source file with the build error as the comment line being used in the source file E1014 This file was not the source file by IDL file corresponding to the specific IDL file When the IDL file that included the specified source file could not be found during tag jump an IDL file that was not corresponding to the source file was specified in the Select IDL File dialog box Specify an IDL file that is corresponding to the source file E1015 The selected IDL file cannot be found When the IDL file that created the specified source file could not be found during tag jump the IDL file could not be found in the Select IDL File dialog box Select an existing IDL file E1016 The IDL file corresponding to the source file was not be found Choose the IDL file Alternatively select Source button to use the source file itself During tag jump the IDL file that was registered in the specified source file could not be found Select the original IDL file or open the source file E1017 The Specific drive for the IDL source files cannot be found Do you wish to save the IDL source files to the same folder of IDL file The drive of the source file specified when saving t
230. ghlighted with a color Figure 6 100 Customize Dialog Box Keyword Tab Customize Keyboard Menu Toolbar User Menu Kepword 1 wer paiaka AE Reseved wads O Ser Revivals Reserve Word olar pooo Seriala Color la Set Color 2 gt Accentuate Peripheral Register M Accentuate Comment Lines 5 Color fe Set iolon Color Set Color 3 S fecentuate AIOS System Calle Ealar Seb Walt Cancel Help 1 Accentuate User Keywords If this check box is checked the keywords defined by the user are displayed in the set color 2 Accentuate Peripheral Register If this check box is checked the peripheral register names of the device used in the project are displayed in the set color 356 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 6 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Accentuate RTOS System Calls If this check box is checked the real time OS keywords are displayed in the set color This check box is valid only when a real time OS of a supported version is installed Accentuate C Language s Reserved Words If this check box is checked the C language keywords are displayed in the set color The C language keywords are set by default but they can be customized by the user Accentuate Comment Lines If this check box is checked the comment parts are displayed in the set color In an IDL file the comments are highlighted by the comment mark set in Change Source File Name on the File m
231. ging 114 Downloading multiple load module files 114 Selecting build mode 114 Setting build options 115 Setting batch build 115 Making the Build Mode Selection combo box active 115 5 8 Tool Management 116 5 aoaaa AAAA n 8 8 OF OO Ce OD OR OOF Oe OO pO 8 es OO a COON OO fF OUO N O 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Setting options for each tool 116 Estimating stack size 116 Dumping the load module file or the object file 116 selecting and setting the debugger to be used 116 Registering external tools 116 Starting up external tools 117 Comparing files 117 Inserting device file 117 Setting environment 117 Setting font 117 Customizing settings 118 Recording key operations 118 Playing back key operations 118 Saving key operations 118 Commands corresponding to key operations 118 Reading key operations 128 Executing macro 128 Registering macro 128 Executing registered macro 128 5 9 Window Management 129 5 Oh SUOT OT COT 10T WI OPS a e Oe OO g CON OO A UO N Arranging windows so they overlap 129 Arranging windows horizontally 129 Arranging windows vertically 129 Splitting a window 129 Moving the caret to the other split window 129 Activating the next window 129 Activating the previous window 130 Displaying a list of windows 130
232. gt Stop Build is selected during batch build or batch rebuild execution a question message is displayed and build processing is paused 5 7 6 Rebuilding Selecting the Build menu gt Rebuild starts up a set of language tools assembler C compiler and link commands for the active project With Build menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their depen dent files have been scanned whereas with Rebuild menu item all the source files are built unconditionally The messages output form the language processing tools during rebuild are output to a log file and displayed on the Output window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop rebuild select the Build menu gt Stop Build Caution In Project Manager V3 xx if the Rebuild menu item is executed while the debugger is activated a load module file is downloaded automatically but in PM plus a load module file is not downloaded To perform batch processing from rebuild to download use the Rebuild and Debug menu item 5 7 7 Batch building Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Build opens Batch Build dialog box and executes building of the projects speci fied in the Batch Build dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace 5 7 8 Batch Rebuilding Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Rebuild opens Batch Build dialog box and exe
233. h Lower Layer Line without Lower Layer 2 Indent Characters Co tf 2 4 4 eT Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command 5 fe Set Indent Character each Edit Window Cancel Help 1 Layer Mark at Top of Line This area sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line Line with Lower Layer Sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line with lower layers The default is Line without Lower Layer Sets the layer mark displayed at the top of a line without lower layers The default is User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 341 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Indent Characters Specify the number of layer indent characters used when a layer is displayed 0 2 4 or 8 characters can be set 3 Image This area displays an image with the set layer mark 4 Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command If this check box is checked all the layers higher than the one specified are collapsed when Expand the Specific Layer is selected from the Layer menu If it is not checked the already expanded layers higher than one specified are left as is 5 Set Indent Character each Edit Window If this check box is checked the number of indent characters is set for each Edit window If it is not checked the setting is executed for the entire PM plus Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes
234. h the error and s indicates the line contents Delete one of the options and try again E1613 Wrong the specific string d s Character strings in a macro instruction were not enclosed by d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Enclose character strings by E1614 Divide by Zero d s An attempt was made to perform division by 0 while a macro instruction was being executed d indicates the line with the error and s indicates the character string with the error Check the division formula and do not perform 0 division E1615 Over 255 characters in the line d A macro instruction line has more than 255 characters d indicates the line number with the error Set a macro instruction with 255 characters or fewer E1616 Syntax Error d s There was a syntax error in the macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the character string with the syntax error Correct the character string syntax and try again E1617 Invalid option d s Invalid options were set for a macro instruction d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the line contents Specify valid options and try again E1618 Invalid command d s There was an invalid instruction when executing a macro file d indicates the line number with the error and s indicates the invalid instruction Set the correct macro instruction and try
235. he Existing file When an existing startup file is used select this radio button If Brows button is clicked the Startup File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the Startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If an existing file is used the File Name button cannot be selected Copy and Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is copied and used select this radio button Specify the startup file name to be the copy source and the startup file name to be the copy destination If Brows button is clicked the Copy Startup File from dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the startup file to be the copy source is displayed in the Copy from edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a rela tive path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The S
236. he IDL file could not be found Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file E1018 The IDL source file s path cannot be found Do you wish to change the path The source files save to the same folder of IDL file if you select No The path specified by the source file when saving an IDL file could not be found Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1019 The path of IDL source file has not be found This file will be save to the same IDL file s folder The path specified by the source file when saving an IDL file or changing the source file name could not be found Change the source file output destination using Change Source File Name or generate a source file in the same folder as the IDL file E1020 Cannot convert to new path Make sure that the path is correct The path could not be changed when opening a project file copied from a different folder Open the project file with an editor and verify the path E1021 The file extension was wrong Please change the file extension An unsupported extension was specified Change the extension and try again E1022 s This file cannot save settings because of read only attribute Please change read only attribute An attempt was made to write
237. he Macro file Dialog Box Change the Macro file E Program Files NEC tool Macro a gt Look ir E Macro enm SM Files of type Macro Filet imc Cancel Help 0 C gt Title delete This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Change button in the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files Explanation of each area a Lookin This area displays the folder containing the selected macro file The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM plus was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab 372 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the macro file to be changed Only a file name with extension imc can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name c Title This area specifies the title of the registered macro Up to 32 characters can be set The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu Functi
238. he following items Opening Explanation of each tab Opening Select the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Explanation of each tab a Workspace tab This tab is used to make settings related to the workspace Figure 6 81 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Workspace Tab PH plus Settings 1 Open last workspace at startup If this check box is checked the workspace file project file when PM plus finished previously is opened when PM plus starts up default 324 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Investigate the files exist at open workspace If this check box is checked when a workspace project is opened it is checked whether there are any files reg istered in the project default 3 Restore window position at each workspace If this box is checked a workspace project is opened at the same window location as the previous time for every workspace 4 Function buttons b Button Function OK Enables the specified settings Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box External Editor tab This tab is used to set an external editor Figure 6 82 PM plus Settings Dialog Box External Editor Tab PH plus Settings User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 325 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Use external editor If this check box is checked the external editor path setting and the
239. he lines selected with range selection will be deleted and the contents of the clipboard will be inserted to the position occupied by the lines selected with range selection At this time the caret will be positioned to the top of the line following the inserted position If however the caret is positioned to the top line of the screen or if is not visible on the screen the screen is scrolled and redisplayed so that the caret is positioned to the middle of the screen If the first layer line having a lower layer is copied or cut off from the other file and pasted to the first layer of the IDL file being edited the source file name of the copy source is set as is If the same source file name exists in the IDL file being edited however the information of the source file name of the copy source will be deleted If an attempt is made to save the IDL file being edited in this case a message prompting you to change the path of the source file name will be dis played then if you will select Yes in response to this message the Change Source File Names dialog box will be dis played In this dialog box specify the name of the source file to be created from the IDL file being edited 5 2 9 Inserting the contents of clipboard with specified format Selecting the Edit menu gt Paste Special opens the Paste Special dialog box to select the format in which the con tents of the clipboard are to be pasted and then inserts the contents of the clipb
240. he previous page Displays the next page OK OK Eats sets ionsandcbsesogabgbon User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 361 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save the Key Operation dialog box This dialog box is used to save the recorded key operation in a file Figure 6 103 Save the Key Operation Dialog Box save the Key Operation E Program Files NEC tool Macro Save in Ej Macro 0 Be File Ha me imc C gt Save as type Macro File imc Cancel Help ze This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Save the Key Operations Explanation of each area a Savein This area displays the folder in which the file is to be saved The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM plus was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab 362 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Only a file name with extension imc can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name
241. he previous version Project manager V3 XX To open a project file generated by the previous version Project manager V3 xx select the File menu gt Open Workspace to open the Open Workspace dialog box and specify Project File prj as Files of type In this case the following message will be displayed PH plus T 401 EE VEO test rsa nl pr This project tile was generated by a previous version of Project Manager PM plus converts to the new format 38 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION When the project file generated by the previous version is read into PM plus each designation is automatically deter mined as follows Workspace file name project file name extension prw Project group name device series name e g V850 Series Project title name If a title setting has been performed with the read file it remains as its title If a title setting has not been performed with the read file it gets the project file name The workspace name can not be renamed However the project group name or the project title name can be renamed by clicking the right mouse button on its name in the Project window If a project file generated by the other NEC Electronics tools debugger etc is to be opened refer to the 5 1 7 Open ing a workspace 5 1 6 Creating anew workspace Selecting the File menu gt New Workspace creates a new workspace To creat
242. he source files selected in the currently active Edit win dow or Project window However if the active Edit window is an IDL file the object files generated from the source file at the caret position are the analysis target files The object file name is displayed in the edit box If no source file is specified nothing will be displayed Function buttons OK Activates the dump command dump850 The analysis results are saved under project file name dmp and displayed in the Edit win dow If admp file already exists the file is renamed as a bak file under project file name dmp bak Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 375 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the widows that are currently open Double clicking a window in the list makes that win dow active Figure 6 110 Window List Dialog Box Window List A Select Window OutPut E V850 testhsample idl Read Only E KAEA sks EI EAERI testatestl e Cancel ion Sample pr Close Windowts Help Open This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Window menu gt Window List Explanation of each area a Select Window Displays the names of open windows Double clicking a window name in the list mak
243. he top of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Top of Line selects the range from the caret position to the beginning of the line is selected with range selection Note that Select to the Top of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 20 Selecting a range to the end of line Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the End of Line selects the range from the caret position to the end of the line with range selection Note that Select to the End of Line menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 21 Selecting entire contents Selecting the Edit menu gt Select All selects the entire contents of the Edit window 70 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 22 Grouping by keyword Selecting the Edit menu gt Grouping be Keyword opens the Grouping by Keyword dialog box in which the lines that contain a specified character string can be collected 5 2 23 Restoring color of grouping line Selecting the Edit menu gt Restore Color of Grouping Lines restores the color assigned to the lines collected with Grouping by Keyword 5 2 24 Creating function prototypes Selecting the Edit menu gt Make Function Proto
244. hich the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Note that Collapse menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Figure 5 17 Collapsing One of the Lower Layers BF Untitled Chaneed Hat 5 ee BF Untitled Changed o oF EOF s Ep t EOF Select the Layer menu gt Collapse 84 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 6 Expanding all of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand All Lower Layers expands all of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the caret line is positioned to the top of the screen Figure 5 18 Expanding All of the Lower Layers BF Untitled Changed Select the Layer menu gt Expand All Lower Layers 5 4 7 Expanding all of the layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand All expands all of the layers in the active Edit window 5 4 8 Collapsing all of the layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse All collapses all of the layers in the active Edit window If the caret is posi tioned to a collapsed layer it will be moved to the top layer 5 4 9 Expanding a specified number of lay
245. i I In the case of a function name without a return value such as shown below the character on the preceding line are judged to be the return value In such a case declare the function type a det main User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 219 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Find String dialog box This dialog box is used to find a character string The search is performed also to the lines in lower layers which are not expanded and if a search key is found in the lower layer the layer is expanded to show the character string Figure 6 25 Find String Dialog Box Find Strine a Find What main 6 Direction Match Whole Word Only Cancel C Up W Match Case help D we W Regular Expression Find from Top End of Line This Source File Only W Display Mini Dialog This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Find menu gt Find Select the Find button on the tool bar Explanation of each area a Find What This area specifies a search key A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the char acter string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored If there are over ten search keys the oldest one will be de
246. ialog Box Find in Files x we Find What man o o gt Of Type fr idl Cancel c p Folder JEN Details gt gt d 4 Search Active Window Only M Match Gaze Help W Look in Subfolders Match Whole Word Only Figure 6 33 Find in Files Dialog Box Details Find in Files a Find What main Find b Of Type kidi Cancel c Folder JEN ei Search Active Window Only IW Match Case pS W Look in Subfolders Match Whole Word Only If Reeular Expression Display the Source File Names in the case of IDL file show File Mames C Show All File Names with Layer f Show File Name was found string with Layer C Show File Name was found string without Layer This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Find menu gt Find in Files Select the Find in Files button on the tool bar User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 235 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Find What This area specifies the character string to be searched for A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the char acter string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored If there are over t
247. ibss sidata PROGBITS TAW Si data S DSS NOBITS TAW sibss R __tp_TEXT TP_SYMBOL gp DATA GP_SYMBOL DATA ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 419 APPENDIX B QUANTITATIVE LIMIT LIST Table B 1 shows the quantitative limit list of PM plus Table B 1 Quantitative Limit List Item 255 characters Workspace related Length of workspace file name Length of project group name Number of projects that can be registered per workspace Number of projects that can be registered per project group Length of project file name Length of project title Length of source file name Length of project related file name Length of other file names Build related Lengths of command character strings that can be set in pre D TPP renee Project related 420 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM INDEX A Compile 112 153 About PM plus 132 158 Debug 114 153 About PM plus dialog box 380 Direct Build Mode Selection 154 Active project 35 Download Some Load Module Files 114 153 Add Build Mode dialog box 303 Edit 114 153 Add Command dialog box 310 Rebuild 113 153 Add New Memo dialog box 276 Rebuild and Debug 112 153 Add New Project Step 1 8 dialog box 95 Select Build Mode 114 153 Add New Project Step 2 8 dialog box 97 S
248. ices are displayed If multiple projects are registered into the project group or if the debugger simulator is running these drop down lists are invalid Clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION source File dialog box Specifies the source file information on the project Figure 5 11 Source File Dialog Box Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 61 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Source Files The names of the source files specified by the project file are displayed in the order the build processing with the relative path on the basis of the project folder Up to 2 048 source files can be registered Caution If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible Make is assembled compiled in accordance with the program type in the order the files are displayed in the list of source files The path of project folder is being used for the path name of the source file when execut ing make The order of linkage depends on the linker in the series to be used Add Opens Add Source Files dialog box to add the source file to the project Remove Removes the selected source file from the list Remove All Removes all the source files from the list Up Moves the selected source file up within the list Moves the selected sour
249. ics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics User s Manual sCENESAS PM plus Ver 5 20 Target Devices 78KOS Series 78KO Series 78K4 Series V850 Series Document No U16934EJ1VOUMOO 1st edition Date Published April 2004 CP K NEC Electronics Corporation 2004 Printed in Japan MEMO 2 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Windows WindowsNT and Microsoft are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PC AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 3 e The information in this document is current as of April 2004 The information is subject to change without notice For actual design in refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc for the most up to date specifications of NEC Electronics products Not all products and or types are available in every country Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information e No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics NEC Ele
250. ied character string could not be found during a character string search 13201 The string s has not be found in the file s The specified character string could not be found during global searching with the Search Active Window Only check box checked The first s indicates the character string specified to be searched and the second s indi cates the file name 13202 PM plus has finished searching the files The string s has not been found in d files The specified character string could not be found during a global search d indicates the number of searched files and s indicates the searched character string 13203 s occurrence s have been replaced All replacement has finished and the number of replaced character strings is displayed s indicates the number of replaced character strings the replacement I3204 PM plus has canceled search command The ESC key was pressed during searching and searching was canceled User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 411 412 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES I3205 PM plus has finished replace in files Global searching has finished 13206 Function Definition Name cannot be found s The function definition line could not be found s indicates the specified function name 13207 s has been searched Global searching is being executed now s indicates the name of the file name currently being searched 13400 This IDL file has added or deleted the IDL source files Please add or dele
251. ification of files Table 6 2 shows the list of buttons on the standard bar Table 6 2 Standard Bar Lists the names of the files opened Opens a Edit window newly Up to 64 Edit windows can be opened including the Search result display windows and the Output windows Loads a existing file and opens the Edit window The name of the file loaded is dis played on the title of the Edit window Opens the Open dialog box Overwrites the file currently being edited Prints the contents of the window currently being edited Displays the printing status of the window currently being edited Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard and deletes them Sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the caret position Searches for the specified character string within multiple files Specifies a character string to be searched for Searches for the specified charac ter string in the currently active Edit window by pressing Enter key Promotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one Demotes the layer of line to which the current caret positioned or the line selected with range selection by one User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 159 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Expands Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is T pos
252. ify that the file is not damaged and execute again If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES F0114 s Cannot be found this file Please check the NEC Electronics tool is installed correctly The tool including the tool DLL displayed in the message could not be found s indicates the file name Check if the tool is installed If not reinstall it F0115 Failed to create temporary file Make sure that work folder exist or the disk is full When creating a temporary file the disk capacity is smaller than the volume of the file to be written or the operating folder specified in the PM plus Settings dialog box does not exist Check the disk capacity or the operating folder and execute again F0116 Failed to open the temporary file The temporary file could not be found or the file is damaged Check if the file exists and is damaged and execute again FO117 s Failed to read the workspace file Make sure that this file has broken The workspace file could not be read s indicates the workspace file name Verify that the workspace file is not damaged F0118 Failed to read the project file Make sure that a this file has broken The project file could not be read Verify that the file is not damaged and execute again F0119 Same project files cannot be read When reading the workspace some of the registered project files
253. ify the name of the startup file to be the copy source The extension of startup file is o or s by default Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Function buttons Sets the specified file as a startup file to be the copy source Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 280 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Startup File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to register The file is to be the copy destination when a sample file or an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Figure 6 57 Startup File to register Dialog Box Startup File to register Gi ES a Look in E VE50_test Gi Al e a start s a System Files of type Star up files 0 3 Cancel Help 2 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File Name button on the New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Select the File Name button on the Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Explanation of each area a Lookin Select the drive or folder that includes the startup files to register from the drop down list User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 281 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the startup file to be reg
254. iler assembler Build mode was added in a language product that does not support build mode Verify that the compiler assembler used is the latest version E1509 Cannot remove the build mode Please conform using the latest version compiler assembler Build mode was added in a language product that does not support build mode Verify that the compiler assembler used is the latest version E1510 Cannot execute this command while the debugger downloading Please execute it after the debugger downloading An attempt was made to execute download again during downloading of the debugger Try again after finishing the download E1511 Cannot execute this command without the debugger start up Please start up the debugger Multiple load module files were downloaded while the debugger was not started up Start up the debugger and try again E1512 The batch build settings is not set up Please set up the batch build settings by Batch Build Settings After workspace creation Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item was executed before the batch build set ting was performed After opening the Batch Build dialog box from the Batch Build Settings menu item and performing the batch build setting execute Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item again E1513 The build or rebuild project is not specified Please set up the batch build settings by Batch Build Settings Batch Build or the Batch Rebuild menu item was exe
255. in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the characters a b or c will appear User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Repetition X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly 0 times or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly O times or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings will appear X in which is described just after a regular expression X is a regular expression indicating that X will appear repeatedly once or more E g a is a regular expression indicating that a will appear repeatedly once or more a aa aaa aaaa Null character strings are not included a means that a will appear repeatedly 0 times or more while aa means that a will appear repeatedly once or more and null character strings are not permitted which is the same operation as the description of a To indicate the repetition of ab namely ab abab ababab ab must be specified not ab Since repetition has a higher priority than connection use parentheses to change the priority The regular expression indicating that
256. inates this wizard for creating a new workspace and generates a new workspace file and a project file belonging to that workspace according to the displayed information Cancel Stops the operation for creating a new workspace file and returns to its previous status in which the previously read workspace file is available for use Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Specify a workspace file name a folder position a project group name and the series and device name of the target device to be used The specification of the item marked with in this dialog can not be omitted i e the Next gt button can not be selected Figure 5 2 New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 178 Workspace Information Workspace File Hame Systempm 31 Workspace Information 2 Select Real Time O5 Create Blank Workspace Folder 3 Startup File 2 gt eweeltest SS ine 4 Register Made H Project Group Name B Link Directive File 3 _ gt BBO 6 Setup Source Files Series Name Device Name f Select Debugger 4 gt V850 Series furo7o3102 peat Device Install H VS50 Series Only 2 5 This will set up the basic information about the workspace and the project Required field 4 Back Cancel Help
257. ind menu gt Back Jump moves the caret back to the position immediately before the previous jump This menu item becomes valid if the following jump is performed Mark Jump To the Specific Line To the Specific Line in the Source file To the Top of File To the Index Line To the Top Layer at caret To the End of File To the Function Definition To the Matching Brace Jump from Function List of the View menu Jump from Layer List of the View menu Some Layer Line Up Some Layer Line Down if range selection has been performed the selected range is released and then the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that Back Jump menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 15 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 19 Moving the caret to the function definition line Selecting the Find menu gt To the Function Definition moves the caret to the definition line of the function name that is at the current caret position or is selected with range selection Specification except for a function cannot be per formed If a project is opened it searches for the definition line in all the files registered with the project
258. ing View menu gt Display All Object as Content displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as contents 5 5 12 Displaying all objects as icons Selecting View menu gt Display All Object as Icons displays all the objects in the currently active Edit window as icons User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 89 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 Project Management 5 6 1 Creating a project file Up to 128 source projects can be registered per workspace When registering a project to a new workspace A project file can be created using one of the following three methods Refer to the appropriate method when creating the workspace Creating a new project file A new workspace can be created by specifying the necessary project information in order in a wizard format Refer to 5 1 6 Creating a new workspace Creating a workspace using a project file created by the PM V3 xx In PM plus a workspace can be created by reading a project file created by the PM V3 xx Refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Project manager V3 xx Creating a workspace using a project file created by an NEC Electronics debugger simulator A workspace can be created by using a project file that has been updated the project information for PM plus ina wizard format Refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace When registering a project to an existing workspace Creating a new project file Re
259. ing a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped When opening an empty workspace file When dropping a workspace file prw extension Closes the workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a project file prj extension Creates a project group newly and add a project file The newly created project group name is the device series name used in the added project file When multiple project files are dropped if the dropped project file uses the same device it is registered to the same project group If the device series is the same but the device name differs a number is suffixed to the project group name Such numbers are suffixed from 1 A workspace file and project
260. ing line are judged to be the return value In such a case declare the function type a det main d User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 181 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d Display specifications The function name candidate and function details displayed by the smart lookup function differ depending on whether the workspace is opened or closed When editing source file affiliated with workspace with workspace in opened state The function name candidates are displayed based on the information of the source file affiliated with the work space If multiple projects exist the function name candidates are displayed based on the function information of all the projects When editing source file not affiliated with workspace with workspace in opened state The function name candidates are displayed based on the function information in that Edit window The function name candidates of the source file affiliated with the workspace are not displayed When workspace is in closed state The function name candidates are displayed based on the function information in that Edit window Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the Edit window When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and proje
261. installed are displayed on the drop down list If the name of the real time OS to be used is selected the RTOS setting button becomes valid and clicking this button opens the dialog box for setting the real time OS Refer to the user s manual of the real time OS for details on the setting User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 97 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Specify the startup file to be used by a radio button This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Figure 5 22 Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File Dialog Box Add New Project Step 3 6 Startup File Please specify the Startup File 1 Project Information 1 gt Copy and Lise the Sample file 2 Select Real Time 05 23 Startup Filej 4 Register Mode 3 Copy and Use the Existing file 6 Link Directive File app ian 6 Setup Source Files ie r Select Debugger 4 e Do Not specify now 8 Confirmation H VE50 Seres Only 2 5 2 Use the Existing file Erawee The Startup File Hame to register 5 C V8501_testhcrtE File Name The Startup File includes codes to be executed on Startup or Reset The sample file initializes RAM and stack then calls the mamn function In case of using the sample file please customize it according as your
262. ion User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 225 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Tab character t Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear in that order E g abc is a regular expression indicating that characters a b and c will appear in that order Selection X Y in which is described between X and Y is a regular expression indicating that either X or Y will appear E g alb c is a regular expression indicating that one of the
263. ion Selecting the Project menu gt Project Settings opens Project Settings dialog box in which the project information can be set Note that the name of project group can not be changed in the Project Settings dialog box To change the name select the project group name on the Project window click the right mouse button and use the Edit Project Group Name menu that is displayed 5 6 12 Adding a source file Selecting the Project menu gt Add Source Files displays the Add Source Files dialog box in which the source file can be added to the active project 5 6 13 Adding a project related file Selecting the Project menu gt Add Project Related Files displays the Add Project Related Files dialog box in which the project related file can be added to the active project 5 6 14 Adding other files Selecting the Project menu gt Add Other Files displays the Add Other Files dialog box in which any file can be added to the active project as other file 5 6 15 Making the Active Project Selection combo box active Selecting Project menu gt Direct Select Active Project makes the Active Project Selection combo box of the toolbar active Active projects can be switched by selecting a project 110 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 16 Changing a project group name To change the project group name select the project group name on the Project window click th
264. ion will differ depending on the following settings A Expand Caret Line Only check box which is in this dialog box B Collapse Deeper Layer than Specified Layer as Expand Specified Layer Command check box which is on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Layer tab Ta 8B The Position of the Caret Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret OFF ON Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret The layers lower than the one specified are collapsed Moves to the index line of the specified layer that includes the current caret Not moves The layers lower than the caret position are collapsed 246 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to collapse specified layers Figure 6 38 Collapse to Specified Layer Dialog Box Collapse to Specified Layer a e Specify The Layer OK Collapse Layer i Valid 17 12 b t Collapse Caret Line Only ancel OK Cancel Help Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Layer menu gt Collapse the Specific Layer Explanation of each area a Specify The Layer Specify the number of layers to be collapsed A value within the range of 1 to 127 can be specified The last set ting is displ
265. is dialog box is used to display a list of the shortcut keys set in PM plus About PM plus dialog box This dialog box is used to display the version information about PM plus Entry Macro Files dialog box This dialog box is used to register a macro file to a key 136 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6 1 shows a screen image when displaying the various windows Figure 6 1 Window Composition of PM plus ete PH plus Sample_prw test _ c C AAV850_testttest c Untitled1 File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help F teaho las eel Teer TBE s 1AL Fy Et E Kensa Sample testi c y t Testi c t pracn prac pracr C VG50 teat testi c Files Memo H Ts Button Control 3 Project s lg Servo Control 2 Project s 1 WF testl c C WW650_test test _c Untitled OF P Veo Test testleti2a gt Erik Hinclude t H E test3 c include 1 files were searched EOF EE testte a eee Include Files LPCHAIN E Test2 h be A teste an teste c HA testae oo testte NECTOOL32 BIN casSO exe cpu 3102 g c testi ct H E Testl h H E Test3 h H E Test4 h A S Project Related Files P E crtE o ld Total error 3 O Total warning s O EOF 2 T Project window Edit window Search result display window Ou
266. is inserted on the line above the caret position The caret moves to the beginning of the line The files that can be inserted are as follows IDL file Text format file Figure 6 12 Insert File Dialog Box a Look Ir Sy V850 test xl A ci aa crths test1 c testte testac testdc Files of type SourceF ile kc c2s s Cancel Help Qum go fluid Layer Fue 10 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Insert file Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below 190 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type File name Files of type c Apply Layer Rule Specify the name of the file to be inserted The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are displayed in the default condition When opening a workspace file Source Files Caution The source file extension corresponding to the currently active project is displayed Include Files h inc idea L Files idl Text Files txt All Files When not op
267. is menu item is displayed only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active The object to be analyzed are the load module file of the active project specified with the dump850 dialog box or the object file generated from the source files selected on the active Edit window Project window If the active Edit window is an IDL file the object file generated from the source file indicated by the caret is analyzed The analyzed results are saved under the file name project file name dmp If the same file name already exists the previous file is renamed project file name dmp bak The execution of dump850 can be stopped by using the ESC key In this case the results are not displayed Refer to the CA850 compiler package user s manual for details on dump850 5 8 4 Selecting and setting the debugger to be used Selecting the Tool menu gt Debugger Settings opens the Debugger Settings dialog box The debugger to be used the load module files to be downloaded and other options can be set in this dialog box 5 8 5 Registering external tools Selecting the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool opens the Register External Tool dialog box in which the external tools to be used can be registered Up to 10 external tools can be registered The icons of the tools set as external tools are displayed as buttons on the external toolbar 116 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 8 6 Starting up external t
268. is specified in the open project file s indicates the specified project file name Build cannot be exe cuted in this status Specified a device here now or later using the Project Settings command E1405 s1 The device file was not found Device sz2 Please install a device file by the device file installer The device file set to the specified project file could not be found s1 indicates the project file name and s2 indi cates the device name Check that the device file is installed If the device file is not installed install it by the device file installer User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 395 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1406 The file s already entered The specified file has already been registered in the project s indicates the file name Rename the file using a different file name and register it again E1407 This project file is not a project file generated with PM plus Project Manager Please update this project The specified project file was created by a different NEC Electronics tool debugger etc not PM plus or PM Update the project information to that for PM plus E1408 This type cannot be selected multiple Please select one file When adding a file related to the project a file type that could only be specified once was specified more than once in the project Select just one file and execute it E1409 Project group name is not specified Please enter project group name An attempt was made to cl
269. is tab is used to make settings related to files Figure 6 84 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Recent Tab PH plus Settings COWES besthtest oc CA WESOL best tesk c CW ESOL best tesks c 1 History type Specifies the type of history to be edited Recent File A list of the file names displayed to File menu gt File History is displayed in the Recent List default Recent Workspace In the Recent List display a list of workspace file names displayed in File menu gt File History 330 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 2 4 Recent List Specifies the history to be edited display a list of workspace file names displayed in File menu gt File History CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE in the default condition Multiple histories can be added Button Up Down Delete Function Moves the selected history up within the list When the history at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected his tory moves to the bottom of the list When no history is selected or when multiple histories are selected this button is disabled Moves the selected history down within the list When the history at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected his tory moves to the bottom of the list When no history is selected or when multiple histories are selected this button is disabled Deletes the selected history When no history is selected this b
270. istered The extension of startup file is o or s by default Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a startup file to register The specified startup file is registered to the project related files Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 282 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Figure 6 58 Link Directive File Dialog Box Link Directive File ki x a Look in E vonl test Al Files of type Link Directive FileGk dir Cancel Help b Me This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Brows button on the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to be specified from the drop down list b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 283 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a link directive file The specified link directive file is
271. item after stopping the program 5 7 13 Downloading multiple load module files Selecting the Build menu gt Download Some Load Module Files enables the multiple load module files to be loaded onto the debugger This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active The load module files to be loaded are those specified as the debug target files of an active project or the files in the Debug Target File List on the Debugger Settings dialog box the Download the debug target files in the same project group check box must be checked When downloading files to the debugger the names of the downloaded files are displayed on the Output window 5 7 14 Selecting build mode Selecting the Build menu gt Select Build Mode opens Build Mode dialog box in which the build mode can be selected added and deleted 114 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 15 Setting build options Selecting the Build menu gt Build Settings opens Build Settings dialog box in which the build options can be set The settable items are follows Options during build Processing to be executed before build Processing to be executed after build 5 7 16 Setting batch build Selecting the Build menu gt Batch Build Settings opens Build Settings dialog box in which the project for batch build or rebuild can be selected and the build sequence can be set 5 7 17 M
272. itioned or the line selected with range selection Expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Opens the Project window Closes the Project window when the Project window is already opened Opens the Output window Closes the Output window when the Output window is already opened b Build bar The build bar consists of the buttons that are related to the build processing Table 6 3 shows the list of buttons on the build bar in the default condition Table 6 3 Build Bar This is the Active Project Selection combo box Active projects can be switched by main Serva Control selecting a project This is the Active Project Selection combo box The following build modes can be specified in the default condition This specification will be reflected in the Build menu gt Select Build Mode Debug Build Creates the object file with the debug information Release Build Creates the object file without the debug information Compiles the selected file a BX ee 160 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Option bar The option bar consists of the buttons that are related to the option settings The order of display of the buttons depends on the loaded tool For example the compiler related buttons are displayed as follows 78K Series es Table 6 4 Option Bar 78K Se
273. itioned to a layer below the second layer it will be positioned to the second layer Note that Show Index 2 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 13 Displaying the first to third layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 3 collapses the fourth and subsequent layers and displays the first to third layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the third layer it will be positioned to the third layer Note that Show Index 3 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 14 Displaying the first to fourth layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 4 collapses the fifth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fourth layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the fourth layer it will be positioned to the fourth layer Note that Show Index 4 menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 4 15 Displaying the first to fifth layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Shown Index 5 collapses the sixth and subsequent layers and displays the first to fifth layers If the caret is positioned to a layer below the fifth layer it will
274. ized because the function name differs according to the value of ifdef void Hifdef ENGLISH FneEng Helse Fncdapan Hendi f Lint Cnt int Made The function name is not recognized because the function name covers two lines due to void Function Name Lint Cnt int Made 1 The function name is not recognized because variable declaration is performed between function name and Hifdef ENGLISH int maini argc arev int argc char arev i User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 253 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Save the Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to save the functions displayed in the Function List dialog box to a file Figure 6 41 Save the Function List Dialog Box Save the Function List a gt Save in E vool test Al ce 0 Flea C amp Save as type Function List Tag File Gt txt Cancel This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Save button in the Function List dialog box Explanation of each area a Save in Specify the folder in which the file is saved By default the current folder is displayed b File name Specify the name of the file to be saved Directly enter the file name in the text box Alternatively select the file name from the list Note that the extension cannot be changed to other than txt or csv Blanks and
275. ject window is the same as the name of the workspace file In addition the project title of the project newly created by this wizard is assigned the name of the project group specified with this area If you wish to change a project title select the Edit Project Title menu by clicking the mouse right button on the target project title in the Project window Series Name and Device Name Select the item to be created and the device file to be used from the drop down list Clicking the Device Install button starts the device file installer to register the new device file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box Specify whether or not to use NEC Electronics real time OS This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Figure 5 3 New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 2 8 Select Real Time 05 Please select the Real Time OS A TOS ETOS 1 Workspace Information 1 hue O gt gt 2 Select eal ie OSH 3 Startup File RTOS Settings 4 Register Mode 5 Link Directive File 6 Setup Source Files Select Debugger o Confirmation 4 VE50 Seres Only 2 5 Please select the Real Time 05 ATOS from NEC Electronics to be used Only the installed ATOS from
276. le Select the file to be compared from the drop down list If the Original file is opened first the name of the file opened file opened second is displayed If the Another file is other than the file opened first the name of the file opened first is displayed A list of all the files currently being edited is displayed on the drop down list If the selected file is the same as the Original file the file name is not displayed If the button is clicked the Open dialog box is opened to select the any file In the Open dialog box the Apply Layer Rule and Gather Files into an Edit Window check boxes and the Layer Rule button are invalid Way of comparison 1 Compare collapse layer If this check box is checked the contents of collapsed layers are also compared default If it is not checked the contents of collapsed layers are not compared 2 Compare layer number If this check box is checked differences in the layer positions are also compared default If it is not checked differences in the layer positions are not compared 3 Display files side by side If this check box is checked the Original file and the Another file are displayed side by side default If it is not checked they are displayed in the status they were in during comparison d Start position 1 Top line If this button is selected comparison starts from the first line of the file default 2 Caret position
277. le currently being edited Saves the file currently being edited to the file whose name is specified Opens the Save As dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 141 Save All Save All Changed files Only Save and Close All Close All Destroy All Change Source File Name Save All Source Files Print Preview Print Print Direct Recent File Recent Workspace Exit PM plus CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Overwrites all the files that are currently open in the Edit windows The con tents of the Edit windows including those that have not been modified are saved However the contents of the Edit windows Output windows and Search result display windows which have the read only attribute are not saved Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Overwrites all modified files that are currently open in the Edit windows Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Saves all the files that are currently open in the Edit windows and then closes the windows Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Closes all
278. le dialog box in which a key operation can be read from the specified file imc To play back the key operation select the Tool menu gt Play Back the Macro File 5 8 17 Executing macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back the Macro File opens the Play back the Macro File dialog box in which a key operation is read from the specified file imc and played back 5 8 18 Registering macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Register the Macro Files opens the Entry Macro Files dialog box in which the specified file imc can be registered to a key 5 8 19 Executing registered macro Selecting the Tool menu gt Play Back the Register Macro plays back the macro registered with Register the Macro Files 128 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 9 Window Management 5 9 1 Arranging windows so they overlap Selecting the Window menu gt Cascade overlaps all currently displayed windows with one another in such a way that their titles are visible cascading 5 9 2 Arranging windows horizontally Selecting the Window menu gt Tile Horizontally tiles all currently displayed windows horizontally 5 9 3 Arranging windows vertically Selecting the Window menu gt Tile Vertically tiles all currently displayed windows vertically 5 9 4 Splitting a window Selecting the Window menu gt Split splits the currently active Edit window into two At this time
279. le for the external tool to be registered with the full path Up to 260 characters can be entered Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If Brows button is clicked the Open dialog box is opened to select the any file 318 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Parameter The arguments used when executing the external tool can be specified here as required Up to 260 characters can be entered c Tool Folder Specify the current folder for starting up the external tool Up to 260 characters can be entered d Menu String Specify the menu name to be displayed when the Start up Ex tool menu item is selected Up to 32 characters can be entered If no character string is specified the name will be the tool execution file name without the path and extension Note that the same name cannot be set more than once e Tool tip String Specify the character string to be displayed as the tool tip on the toolbar Up to 32 characters can be entered f Status bar String Specify the character string to be displayed on the status bar when a menu item is selected Up to 32 characters can be entered Function buttons Opens the Open dialog box to select the file OK Sets the external tool and closes this dialog box The set tool is displayed on Menu List in the Register External Tool dialog box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this di
280. les BToWee r Select Debugger The Startup File Name to register 5 efC VEEO_test crE File Name The Startup File includes codes to be executed on Startup or Reset The sample file initializes RAM and stack then calls the main function In case of using the sample file please customize it according as your target The epecitied Startup File is registered to the Project Related Files Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Copy and Use the Sample file If this button is selected the startup file of the sample that corresponds to the register mode set in the next wizard step is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files The name of the startup file to be reg istered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If real time OS is selected for use in the previous wizard step New Workspace Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box this button cannot be selected 46 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 2 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Use t
281. les dialog box Of the conditions that can be set in the Find in Files dialog box only the following items are effective for Find in Project Match Case Match Whole Word Only Show File Names 5 3 24 Jumping to a desired line tag jump If a file name and a line number are displayed on the line to which the caret is positioned selecting the Find menu gt Tag Jump opens the file and jumps to the desired line This makes it possible to jump from an error message displayed during a build to the corresponding error line in the source file A tag jump can be performed only in the format of file name delimiter line number The following four characters are handled as delimiters Single byte space character Tab character Parentheses and If the file name exceeds 260 single byte characters this is regarded as a tag jump format error and a jump cannot be performed A file name containing any of the following symbols is not regarded as being a file name and jump cannot be per formed nes eee ie If the line number dose not consist of single byte digits the caret will be positioned to the top line of the jump desti nation file If the jump destination line is in a collapsed layer that layer will be expanded before a jump If Select a String between Double Single Quotations as Tag Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab and a character string enclosed in
282. leted The search keys can be saved into an IDL file by checking Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Find Replace tab The setting of the search key s can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What check box on the same tab 220 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Direction Specify a search direction Up Starts an upward search toward the top of the file from the second character to the rightmost one of the character string in the range selection or from the end of the lines in the range selection Down Starts a downward search toward the end of the file from the second character to the leftmost one of the character string in the range selection or from the beginning of the lines in the range selec tion default c Search options area 1 Find from Top End of Line The search does not start from the caret position If Up is selected the search starts from the last line If Down is selected the search starts from the first line 2 Display Mini Dialog If this check box is checked the dialog box turns into a mini dialog box when the Find Next button is next selected Figure 6 26 shows an image of the Find String dialog box mini Figure 6 26 Find String Dialog Box Mini Up Detaile Cancel Help Continues a downward search for a character string matching the specified sear
283. leted from a read only file If Change Color of Grouped Lines Only is checked the Grouping to The Top button can be selected If lines are collected from a read only file by selecting Grouping to Other Delete cannot be selected in the new window of the collected results 216 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box This dialog box is used to automatically generate the prototype declaration of a function Figure 6 24 Select the way of Function Prototypes Dialog Box Select the way of Function Prototypes x gt Add Function Prototypes of index Source file at caret OK a position to top of the Index Source file b i Add Function Prototypes of each Index Source files to Cancel the top of each Index1 Source files Help c E Add Eunction Prototypes to the top of ihe d i Make new windows of Function Prototypes e gt i Make header file of Function Prototypes Header tile Name JEVB50_test Headerh f p heert the include sentence to the each source file This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Edit menu gt Make Function Prototypes Explanation of each area The generation method is selected by the following radio buttons The selectable buttons depend on the file type a Add
284. lines are cut the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line following the cut position When the last line of a document is cut the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line Note that Cut for Append menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 6 Copying character strings Copy for Append Selecting the Edit menu gt Copy for Append adds the contents of the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the end of the clipboard This menu item dose not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the copy portion to the end of the contents of the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed Note that Copy for Append menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 67 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 7 Copying character strings as a screen image Selecting the Edit menu gt Image Copy sends the character string or lines selected with range selection to the clip board exactly as they are displayed on the screen as a screen image Whe
285. list box Opens the Add Command dialog box Changes the command contents selected in the Command list box to the edited contents Remove Up Down OK Cancel Help User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 30 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Command dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the commands used to execute any processing required before or after build copying of output files to another folder etc Figure 6 73 Add Command Dialog Box Add Command EJ a Command Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Add button on the Build menu gt Build Settings Pre Build Process tab Select the Add button on the Build menu gt Build Settings After Build Process tab Explanation of each area a Command Describe the DOS command to be executed before or after build Up to 127 characters can be specified as a com mand Function buttons Button Function K Adds the specified command to the command list box Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box i 310 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit Command dialog box This dialog box is used to edit commands specified as required processing either during build execution prior to after build processi
286. log box Changes the project title and So on Deletes a selected project Displays the file names displayed in the Project window in the order in which they were registered Displays the file names displayed in the Project window in the ascending order Fixes the location of the Project window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 3 Source Files folder CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source files and assembler files registered in the project are grouped here The names of the source files regis tered to the project are displayed under the Source File folder Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor Up to 2 048 source files can be registered per project When the mouse cursor is placed on the source file folder Source Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the source file name the source file name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up menu Clicking the right mouse button on the source file folder or the source file name displays the following menus When a Source File folder is selected Add Source Files Compiler Options Assembler Options When a source file name is selected Add Source Files Delete Source File Compile Open Special Compiler Options Reset Special Compiler Options Properties Opens the Add Source Files dialog box A source
287. ltiple marks can be added c FileName and Line The file name registered for the mark displayed in the Mark Name edit box and the contents of that line are dis played Function buttons Function Clicking the Jump button after selecting a mark makes a jump to the mark position in the window being edited Clicking the Add button after setting the mark names in the Mark Name edit box register a mark Deletes a selected mark A mark can also be deleted with DEL key Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Opens the help for this dialog box Caution In the following cases the mark is deleted from the list in this dialog box If the registered mark line has disappeared due to Cut or Delete menu item etc When the untitled Edit window is closed without saving while there is a mark added in the untitled Edit window When build or compile is executed and the contents of the Output window are updated after a mark has been set in the Output window When the Output window is closed The way to release the range selection when a jump is made differs depending on the status of Release Range Selected Before Jump on the Edit tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box 234 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Find in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to search through multiple files in a specified folder for a character string Figure 6 32 Find in Files D
288. ly positioned is searched Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Find Next Searches for a match for the search key Replace Replaces the character string and continues searching for another match for the search key If a read only file is active this button cannot be selected Replace All Performs a search from the current caret position and replaces all the character strings that match the search key without confirming If a read only file is active this button cannot be selected Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution When the ESC key is pressed the search is aborted The settings of the check boxes and option buttons are stored and displayed at the next replacement If the replacement ends without finding any match for the character string to be replaced the operator is notified by the issue of a message or beep depending on the setting of Warning for Find Replace on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab 228 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Jump to Specified Line dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destination line number in the current file Figure 6 29 Jump to Specified Line Dialog Box Jump to Specified Line a Be i T a Line No fMi p l Cancel 6 Valid 1 1985 Help
289. mation could not acquired Check if the NEC Electronics tool product that is adapted to the function to display version is installed correctly If not install it E1718 s The file was not the latest load module file Please execute build command and update the load module file When executing dump850 the out file which is a target analysis file is older than the source file s indicates the out file name which is a target analysis file Execute build update the load module file and try the command again E1719 s The folder name is illegal Enter the correct folder name An incorrect folder name was specified s indicates the specified folder name Specify a correct folder name User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1720 The Debugger not selected to execute TW Please select the debugger with Debugger Settings When executing TW850 the debugger to be used was not set Set the debugger to be used from Debugger Settings on the Tool menu and try again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 403 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 4 List of Question Messages The question messages output by PM plus are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the message in message number order All question messages have Q prefixed to the message number When these messages are displayed the users must select a button in the message dialog box Q2000 Do you wish to save s When closing PM plus or
290. me button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 52 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box Specify the name of the source file to be registered into the project It is possible to proceed to the next step by clicking the Next gt button even if no source files are specified in this dialog box In this case source files can be registered into the project by specifying with the Project Settings dialog box or drag ging and dropping the source files to be registered onto the Project window Figure 5 7 New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files Dialog Box Hew WorkSpace Step 6 6 Setup Source Files Please setup Source Files 1 Workspace Information 2 Select Real Time O5 3 Startup File 4 Register Model B Link Directive File 26 Setup Source Files Source File Marne T Select Debugger 8 Confirmation H VS50 Series Only 2 5 fou can alzo add source files by specifying the list file or the folder fou don t need to specify all the files here and you can setup source files using Project gt Proj
291. me the file using a different file name and add the source file again User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1416 The file s has already set Do you wish to continue to add source files The specified file has already been set for a source file s indicates the specified file name Rename the file using a different file name and add the source file again E1417 s Syntax error Please check the list file There was a syntax error in the list file s indicates the specified file name Check the syntax of the list file and correct the error E1418 s The project which already supports other devices is registered into this project group Please change the device of a project or change the project group of a registration place An attempt was made to add a project supporting a device that was different from the one supported by the regis tered project to the project group s indicates the project file name Open another project and acquire a device of the same type or register the project in another project group E1419 s A project cannot be registered into this project group any more Please register with other project groups An attempt was made to register more than the maximum number of projects 20 in a project group s indicates the project file name Delete the projects in the project group and register them again or register them in another project group E1420 s This file has already specified as the st
292. message number E1000 s This path has not be found Make sure that the correct path given When specifying a path the specified path did not exist s indicates the specified path Check the path and try again E1001 s This file has not be found Make sure that the correct path and filename given When opening a file the specified file did not exist s indicates the specified file name Check the file name and try again E1002 Cannot change to the using file name An attempt was made to save a file under the name of the file currently being edited Use the name of a file that is not being edited and try again E1003 The file s is read only Please input other file name An existing read only file was specified s indicates the specified file name Use the name of a file that is not read only and try again E1004 Found the Layer in the Text File Please save to IDL format file The open text file has layers when it was overwritten and saved Save layer information in an IDL file format E1005 The layer state is different when the file opened If you save layer information please save to IDL format file The user applied layers to a file after reading it with layer and tried to save it in a text file format Save layer information in an IDL file format E1006 The file name is too long The file name set when tag jump is performed is too long for saving the file under another name Change the file name to a shorter n
293. mpt is made to open a project file created by another NEC Electronics tool debugger or simulator a message is displayed after which the following wizard format dialog boxes for updating the project information for PM plus are opened Enter select the necessary information in each dialog box and click the Next gt button to proceed Project Information dialog box Source File dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 57 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION The configuration of a typical dialog box is described below Project Information a Setting items The items to be set are displayed in this area b Function buttons lt Back Returns to the previous wizard This button is always disabled in the Project Information dialog box Next gt Opens the next wizard This button appears as Finish button in the Source File dialog box In this case sets the project information and the source file information into the project file and terminates this wiz ard Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Opens the help for this dialog box 58 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Project Information dialog box Confirms the project information and modify the project title and the series and device name of the target device to be used Figure 5 10 Project Information Dialog Box Project Information E4 Project File Name emg pri Folder CY ESO test 1 Workspace File
294. n To the Matching Brace Find in Files Replace in Files Find in Project Tag Jump othe lag File Hee Taq Junin Find Find Upward Find Downward Find the Word Upward Find the Word Downward Replace To a Specific Line Build Tool Window Help Ctrl F Ctrl H Ctrl J Home End Chil Home Chl End E ESAME MATON Ctrl L F10 Sra a Searches for the specified character string Opens the Find String dialog box Searches for the specified character string toward the beginning of the file Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Searches for the specified character string toward the end of the file Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Searches for the word at the caret position toward the beginning of the file Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Searches for the word at the caret position toward the end of the file Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool me
295. n CVS is used Displays the status of the file when CVS is used Displays the difference between the files when CVS is used Creates a make file for the project Sets the project information Opens the Project Settings dialog box Adds source files to an active project Opens the Add Source Files dialog box Adds project related files to an active project Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Adds any files to an active project as other files Opens the Add Other Files dialog box Make the Active Project Selection combo box of the toolbar active Active projects can be switched by selecting a project Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Build menu File Edt Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Build and Debug Rebuild and Debug Compile Build Stop Build Rebuild Batch Build Batch Rebuild Update dependencies Clean Edit Debug Download Some Load Module Files Select Build Mode Build Settings Build and Debug FA Rebuild and Debug Compile Ctrl F 7 Build Fr Stop Huld Rebuild Batch Build Batch Rebuild Update dependencies Clean Edit Debug Donnoad Some Load Madde Ailes Select Build Mode Build Settings Batch Build Settings Performs the build processi
296. n List Changes the extension selected in User Extension List dd Deletes the extension selected in User Extension List Moves the selected extension up within User Extension List Moves the selected extension down within User Extension List User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Extension of Backup File Specify the extensions for creating backup files IDL file and text file extensions can be specified Up to 3 char acters of extensions can be set IDL File Specify the extensions for creating backup IDL files The default is bkl TEXT File Specify the extensions for creating backup text files The default is bak 5 Automatic Backup This area selects whether a file is automatically saved in the folder specified by the environmental variable Temp while it is being edited Don t Save Auto backup is not executed default Save The File A temporary file is created each set time The time can be set in 1 minute units from 1 to 120 If PM plus is exited incorrectly due to an unexpected event at startup this temporary file is opened when PM plus is started up next time The temporary file is automatically deleted when PM plus is exited correctly 6 Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 329 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d Recent tab Th
297. n opening a files are valid If it is not checked the options accord with the status of the Set Layer Rule dialog box Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The End of Line in Saving a File If this check box is checked null characters at the end of a line are deleted when a file is stored If it not checked the file is saved with null characters remaining at the end of a line Make a Backup File If this check box is checked a backup file is created when a file is stored default The extension of the backup file can be specified freely in the Extension of Backup File area Clear The Undo Buffer in Saving a File If this check box is checked the undo buffer is cleared when a file is stored If the Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The End of Line in Saving a File check box is checked this box is checked and dimmed invalid Extension User Specify The specified extension is displayed in the drop down list of the Files of type in the Open dialog box Save As dialog box and Insert File dialog box The order in the drop down list is as displayed in the list of user exten sions Up to four extensions can be added Extension Enters the extensions to be added If multiple file extensions are compiled into one they are delimited by Examples are shown below To display a CPP file gt cpp To display a CPP file and an H file gt cpp h User Extension List Displays the added extensions Adds the extensions to User Extensio
298. n the Project window is displayed b New Project Title Specify the newly set project title directly in this area Up to 260 characters can be entered Function buttons Changes to the specified project title Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 269 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Project Related Files dialog box This dialog box is used to add project related files to a project Figure 6 51 Add Project Related Files Dialog Box Add Project Related Files main EE a Look in E VE50_test amp ce b Files of type Object files o Cancel Help c gt Open As Object files hs This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Add Project Related Files with the Project Related Files folder selected in the Project window Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the project related files to be added from the drop down list 270 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the project related files to be added Up to 259 characters can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name A list of the file types that can be added are displayed in the
299. n the contents of the lines are sent to the clipboard no layer information is sent Each time the layer is demoted by one a space or Tab code is written The code to write can be specified with Image Copy on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Furthermore the number of the indent characters can be specified with Indent Characters on the same Edit tab If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines that have been col lapsed will not be sent to the clipboard Note that objects cannot be copied 5 2 8 Inserting the contents of clipboard Selecting the Edit menu gt Paste reads the contents of the clipboard and inserts them at the caret position At this time the layer information is also inserted When a character string is pasted the caret will move to the position following the character string in the default condi tion If however Don t Move Caret as Paste is checked on the Edit tab on the Option menu PM plus Settings the caret will not move When lines are pasted they are inserted to the line above the caret position and the screen is redisplayed without mov ing of the caret position If however the caret is positioned to the top line of the screen or if is not visible on the screen the screen is scrolled and redisplayed so that the caret is positioned to the middle of the screen If you perform Paste while performing range selection t
300. nce connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 243 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Find Next Performs a search until a match for the search key is found During the search this button is grayed Replace Replaces the found character string and continues the search During the search this but ton is grayed Replace This File Replaces all matches for the search key following that in the range selection No confirma tion message is displayed After the replacement in the current file ends the next file is searched Replace All A message notifying the risk of the replacement in files is displayed first If the Yes button is selected replaces all matches for the search key following that in the range selection Closes the dialog box During a file search or replacement this button displays Cancel Stops the search or replacement When the search stops this button displays Close Opens the help for this dialog box Caution If Find Next or Replace is selected the file in which a match for the search key is found is displayed in
301. nd include files and reflects the updated contents in the Project win dow Open Opens a selected file under the set editor Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file When a dependency relationship file name is selected Update Dependencies Updates a dependency relationship between source files and include files and reflects the updated contents in the Project win dow Open Opens a selected file under the set editor Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file 6 Project Related Files folder The related files link directive files and library files to build the project are grouped here Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name opens the file under the set editor When the mouse cursor is placed on the project related file folder Project Related Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the project related file name the project related file name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up menu Clicking the right mouse button on the project related file folder or the project related file name displays
302. nd the screen is scrolled so that line is visible Range selection is canceled at the point when an operation that causes the caret to move is performed Then the caret moves to a new location If however range selection is canceled by pressing an arrow key the new caret position will be as follows Right arrow key or Down arrow key Right end of the selected character string range end of the last line toward the end of text of the selected line range Left arrow key or Up arrow key Left end of the selected character string range beginning of the first line toward the beginning of text of the selected line range While you are selecting a range pressing the ESC key causes the range selection to be canceled Moving lines layers When you drag the mark at the beginning of line the line s is moved with either of the following marks displayed loves a single line only Moves multiple lines Dragging the mark of a line with a lower layer causes the line and the lower layer to be moved Dragging the mark of a line to the right or left causes the layer level to be changed 178 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Copying lines layers When you drag the mark at the beginning of line while holding down the CTRL key the line s is copied with either of the following marks displayed gt Copies a single line only a Copies multiple lines Dragging the mark of a line with a lower layer
303. ndicates the full path name of the application Check that the path for the application is correct and try again E1707 A reserved word cannot contain any of the characters lt amp lt gt V Prohibited characters were specified for the keywords of reserved words Specify characters other than prohibited ones for the keywords E1708 The Title menu string is already in use An attempt was made to set a menu character string that had already been set Change the menu name to one that has not been set and set again E1709 Wrong the tag jump format It needs F and L There is an error in the tag jump format in the external editor setting F and L need to be specified in the tag jump format E1710 Cannot exit PM plus while TW analyzing An attempt was made to close PM plus while TW850 was executing analysis Close PM plus after TW850 has finished E1711 s The path or file name is illegal Enter The correct path or filename An attempt was made to specify an incorrect path or file name s indicates the file name Specify a correct path or file name User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 401 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1712 s The filename is illegal Enter the correct filename An incorrect file name was specified This includes the specification of a reserved device such as con and com1 s indicates the specified file name Specify a correct file name E1713 s The file was not the latest assembler
304. ndow Up to 260 characters can be entered for project title 260 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Series Name and Device Name The series and device name of the target device to be used are displayed They can be changed by selecting from the drop down lists in which all the series and device names of the installed devices are displayed If multiple projects are registered into the project group or if the debugger simulator is running these drop down lists are invalid Caution If after a workspace project specifying a device not installed on the host machine has been opened the Project Settings dialog box is opened the device name on the Project Information tab is displayed as a blank However if a device file has been installed with the following method the device name is displayed at the top in the drop down list Starts the device file installer DFINST Starts the device file installer DFINST by clicking the Device Install button in the New Workspace Step 1 8 Workspace Information dialog box Starts the device file installer DFINST by clicking the Device Install button in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box Starts the device file installer DFINST by clicking the Device Install button on the Project Information tab in the Project Settings dialog box In cases such as the above close the workspace once install the device file used by that pr
305. ndow menu 2 3 4 5 6 Project menu 7 8 9 10 10 Help menu 140 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 1 File menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Edit Find Layer Mew Project Build Tool Window Help Hew Open Insert file Close Hew Workspace Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace Save ave Os Change source File Name save All Source Files Print Preview Print 1 testi 2 testte a Mp le pray System Apr Exit PM plus Open Insert file Close New Workspace Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace Save Save As Ctrl h Ctrl O Ctrl s Ctr l P Opens a new Edit window newly Up to 64 Edit windows can be opened including the Search result display windows and the Output windows Loads a existing file and opens the Edit window The name of the file loaded is displayed on the title of the Edit window Opens the Open dialog box Inserts a specified file at the caret position in the currently active Edit win dow Opens the Insert File dialog box Closes the currently active Edit window or Search result display window If there are any files with read only having the same name those files will be closed Opens the wizard to create a workspace newly Opens a Workspace Opens the Open Workspace dialog box Saves the contents of the workspace by overwriting Closes the currently open workspace Overwrites the fi
306. ne Project Fe laa Other Files Special Compiler Options test oc i 6 servoLibrary Reset Special Compiler Options testl c Properties Click the right mouse button after select ing the source file entry c H a Button Control 3 Project s Ek 7 Servo Control 2 Project s Si j main E a Source Files bee E E test E TE test4 c E Include Files ea T3 Project Related Files E J Other Files E LB ServaLibrary Options are set individually per source file entry c In PM plus individual options related to the compiler can be set for each registered source file 34 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 4 Selecting Active Project In PM plus multiple projects can be registered to one workspace When build is executed therefore the project to be built must be pre specified To specify the active project select the appropriate project on the Project window and click the right mouse button The icon of the project will change from gray to pink when selected as an active project Only an active project is built or debugged Refer to 5 6 2 Selecting active project Figure 4 3 Selecting Active Project Project indow Oy x Projectindow iof Files Merc Files Mema ffs Button Control 3 Projects 7 Servo Control 2 Project s Si main 5 ra Source Files Project group name Multiple projects can be managed the ex
307. ne in the Edit window An IDL backup file opened by selecting the Open menu or the history of the file A default file name is backup file name idl An Edit window in which multiple files were read A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window A file saved automatically A default file name is created based on the contents of the first line in the Edit window A newly created source file A default file name is created based on the contents of the first layer line of each file in the Edit window 5 1 11 Saving a file with a new name Selecting the File menu gt Save as opens the Save As dialog box to assign a name to the file being edited and save it In addition the indent by the layer and the setting of the Tab can be specified with the Save Source Files Options dialog box 5 1 12 Saving all files Selecting the File menu gt Save All saves all of the files currently open in the Edit window by overwriting The con tents of the Edit window including those that have not been modified are also saved however the contents of the Edit win dow Output window and Search result display window that have the read only attribute are not saved Note that Save All Changed files Only menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 1 13 Saving all files Ch
308. ne with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the entire contents of the Edit window Collects the lines containing a specified character string Opens the Grouping by Keyword dialog box Restores the color assigned to the lines collected with the Grouping by Keyword Makes the function prototypes automatically Opens the Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box Inserts new embedded objects Opens the Insert Object dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Link Edits the linked object and changes the link information Opens the Links dialog box Object Starts an application and converts a file type for a selected object User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 145 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Find menu File Edit Find Layer View Project Find Replace To a Specific Line Mark Jump To the Top of Line To the End of Line To the Top of File To the End of File To the Ree To the Top Layer at caret To the Function Detinisio
309. ned specify the title character string of the caption This is a character string specification so enclose with Readonly ReadOnly No Specifies readonly when selecting the Edit window of Read only If ReadOnly number is displayed on the caption specify the number as readonly 1 etc 124 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Table 5 9 Command Format for Key Board Macro control command related Contents Command Format Exit PM plus exit Start up external execution module exec lt parameter gt lt parameter gt Specify the name of the execution module and all the exe cution module arguments with Example exec dir exec dir od txt exec z hide hidemaru exe startup z hnide hidemaru exe Numeric variable definition variable name variable name initial value initial value Specify the initial value of the variable Caution An arbitrary variable name can be set for the variable name When the initial value is omitted 0 is assumed Example cnt initialized to 0 ont2 5 initialized to 5 Character string variable definition character string variable name character string variable name initial value initial value Specify the initial value of the variable Caution An arbitrary character string name can be set for the character string variable name When the initial value is omitted Example str initialized to str2 ABC initialized
310. ng Figure 6 74 Edit Command Dialog Box Edit Command a Command This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Edit button after selecting each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Set tings Pre Build Process tab Double click each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Settings Pre Build Process tab Select the Edit button after selecting each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Set tings After Build Process tab Double click each command in the command list box on the Build menu gt Build Settings After Build Process tab Explanation of each area a Command Describe the DOS command to be executed before or after build Up to 127 characters can be specified as a com mand User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 311 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Edits the command with the specified contents Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 312 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Debugger Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the details of the debugger to be used Figure 6 75 Debugger Settings Dialog Box Debugger Settings Select Debugger Debugger a File Hame
311. ng Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Find Replace tab The setting of the character string to be replaced can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What check box on the same tab Replace With This area specifies a replacement character string The last specified replacement character string is displayed by default If no replacement has been made this area is left blank A replacement character string can be saved into an IDL file by checking Memorize Find What in ideal L File check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Find Replace tab The setting of a replacement charac ter string can be changed by checking Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With check box on the same tab b Replacement options area 1 2 Match Whole Word Only If this box is checked a whole word match for the search key is searched for Match Case If this box is checked a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default Regular Expression If this box is checked regular expressions are supported in the replacement The following regular expressions are supported Expression Description Represents the character itself X and Y appear in the stated order concatenation X or Y appears select
312. ng and then starts the debugger Performs the rebuild processing and then starts the debugger Compiles the selected file Performs the build processing for the active project If during build execution build processing is stopped If during batch build or batch rebuild execution a question message is displayed and build processing is paused Performs the rebuild processing for the active project Executes building of the projects specified in the Batch Build dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace Opens the Batch Build dialog box Executes rebuilding of the projects specified in the Batch Build dialog box from multiple projects registered to the workspace Opens the Batch Build dialog box Updates the dependency relationship of the source files and include files Deletes the intermediate files and hexadecimal code files that have been generated by the build processing Starts the specified editor to open the selected file Starts the debugger Downloads multiple load module files registered as the same project group to the debugger This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active Specifies the build mode Opens the Build Mode dialog box Performs the setting for the build processing Opens the Build Settings dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 153 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build Settings Selects the project for batch build or rebuild an
313. nguishes a two byte and one byte character paragraph Specifies a paragraph when omitted no paragraph is speci fied color Changes the color after grouping delete Deletes after grouping none Does nothing after grouping coloronly Only changes the color cannot be specified at same time as process after grouping undocolor Restores the original color of grouped lines window Groups lines in a new Edit window Restore Color of Grouping Lines undogroupcolor Table 5 4 Command Format for Key Board Macro Find menu Find Upward findup lt character string to be searched gt word matchcase zen special loop askloop frombottom source lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression loop Does not end the search at the top or bottom line askloop Displays a message to verify when the search does not end at the top or bottom line frombottom Searches from the top or bottom line source Searches only source files with caret 120 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Contents Command Format Find Downward finddown lt character string to be searched gt word matchcase zen spe cial loop askloop frombottom source lt charact
314. nloads a load module file at the same time to facilitate the debug operation Refer to Debugger Settings dialog box Figure 4 4 Selecting Debugger Debugger Settings Select Debugger Debugger File Hame EANECT ools32 BINSMESOS2 EXE Option Debug Target Debug Target File aout Execute Symbol Reset after Download M Execute CPU Reset after Download Debug Uptions Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Debug Target File List OC ODO testa out Cancel Help 36 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 6 Executing Build Selecting Build menu gt Build and Debug starts batch processing from build to debug for the active project If build ends correctly the set debugger starts up automatically and loads the created load module file if the debugger does not have to be started up execute build by selecting the Build menu gt Build At this time a make file mak is also created automatically in default condition The messages that are output from the language processing tool during build execution are displayed on the Output window At this time place the caret on the error warning line that is displayed and double click the left mouse button to open the source file and tag jump to the relevant error warning line Refer to 5 7 1 Building and Debugging 4 7 Other Settings There are many other functions is provided to enable more efficien
315. nnot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 163 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project window The Project window is used to display various information on the projects currently opened Figure 6 4 Project Window a b Propechindow Files Hemo H F Button Control 3 Frojectis S i Servo Control 2 Projectie SH E main ave Source Files El 1E Ee beste c F E test3 c E JE test4 c 7 Include Files EE Test2 h ae AP testle teste c testat testte H E Testl h E E Test3 h E E Test4 h fies Project Related Files o ae a E E ibc La Other Files 2 Specification doc ce 3 ServoLibrary This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Drag and drop function Opening Select the File menu gt Open Workspace Select the View menu gt Project Window 164 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Files tab The File tab displays the file information to be managed by a project file When there are multiple projects the information is displayed in project units A source file
316. nto the project are displayed in the source file list box The source files are registered to the project file in the order currently shown in this list box In addition the build processing are performed in the registered order Caution If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible If after a source file is added the series name is changed by returning to the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box files among the previously added file other than those with extensions corre sponding to the series after the change are also displayed in the source file list box In this case delete these source files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box to specify the source code files to be registered to the project Up to 2 048 source files can be registered per project The extension of source code file differs depending on the series name registered to the project Remove Removes the selected file from the source file list box By selecting a file name while holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key multiple source file names can be selected at once The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source file list box this button can not be selected Removes all the source files from the source file list box The names of the removed files are not registered to the project If no source file is selected or listed in the source
317. nu gt Customize Menu tab Replaces the specified character string with the replacement char acter string Opens the Replace String dialog box Moves the caret position to the specified line Opens the Jump to Specified Line dialog box 146 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM To the Specific Line in the Source file Mark Jump To the Top of Line To the End of Line To the Top of File To the End of File To the Index Line To the Top Layer at caret Same Layer Line Up Same Layer Line Down Back Jump To the Function Definition To the Matching Brace Find in Files Replace in Files Find in Project Tag Jump To the Tag File Next Tag Jump Next Tag Jump Upward CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the caret position to the specified line in the specified source file Opens the Jump to Specified Line in the Source file dialog box Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Registers the current caret position as a mark or moves the caret position to the marked line Opens the Mark Jump dialog box Moves the caret position to the top of the line Moves the caret position to the end of the line Moves the caret position to the top of the top line of the file Moves the caret position to the end of the last line of the file Moves the caret position to the top
318. nual U16934EJ1VOUM 199 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Source File Names Source File After selecting a source file name inline editing can be performed by clicking the left mouse button Up to 259 characters can be specified Moreover after selecting a source file name double clicking it or clicking the Change File Names button opens the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box At this time if multiple source file names are selected the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box is opened If the name of the source file has not been set the contents of the first layer line which cor responds to the first line of the source file will be the source file name If there are any other source files with the same name that name suffixed by a 4 digt number is displayed as the source file name If the first layer line contains no characters a 4 digt number extension will be the source file name The extension will be c if there are any C language comments between the first and 300th lines or asm if there are no comments Note that the following characters cannot be used for the source file name Ne Be ee and Title The contents of the first layer line which corresponds to the first line of the source file are extracted and displayed b Not Divide the Source File If this check box is checked the source file is not divided The entire file is saved as a single source file if th
319. o add a new memo Figure 6 54 Add New Memo Dialog Box Add New Memo a hiema K __ Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the right mouse button menu gt Add New Memo on the Memo tab in the Project window Explanation of each area a Memo Enter anew memo directly The date and time of addition is also displayed on the Project window Function buttons Adds the memo newly Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 2 6 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Startup File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file when an existing file is used as a Startup file Figure 6 55 Startup File Dialog Box Startup File a Look in E sample Al ce Files of type Startup Filetto 5 Cancel Help b ee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Brows button on the New Workspace Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder that includes the startup file to be specified from the drop down list b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the startup file The extension of startup file is o or s by default Bl
320. o which the current caret is positioned Applies a layer rule to the current contents of the Edit window Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 5 View menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Function List Layer List Standard Bar Build Bar Option Bar Ex Tool Bar Status Bar Project Window Output Window Display Content lcon Display All Object as Content Display All Object as Icon Function List Layer List Standard Bar Build Bar Option Bar Ex tool Bar otatus Bar Project Window Cutput Window Drepley Gontente leon Wenas All Whyject as wonten Hegas All Whyect as leon Lists the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window Opens the Function List dialog box Lists the layers of the file displayed in the active Edit window Opens the Layer List dialog box Toggles the display of the standard bar between on and off Toggles the display of the build bar between on and off Toggles the display of the option bar between on and off Toggles the display of the external tool bar between on and off Toggles the display of the status bar between on and off Toggles the display of the Project window between on and off Toggles the display of the Output window between on and off Toggles the display format of an object between contents or icon When an object displayed as icon is selected
321. oard to the caret position In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 68 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 10 Deleting character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete deletes the character string or the lines selected with range selection The charac ter string or the lines selected with range selection are not sent to the clipboard When a character string is deleted the caret position will not be changed When lines are deleted the caret will be posi tioned to the beginning of the line following the deleted position When the last line of a document is deleted the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line 5 2 11 Deleting a word Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete the Word deletes a single word at the caret position The deleted characters are not sent to the clipboard Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Delete the Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 12 Deleting characters to the end of a word Selecting the Edit menu gt Delete to End of Word deletes the portion of the word that is to the right of the caret posi tion The deleted characters are not sent to the clipboard Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Delete to the End of Word
322. of the macros that are already registered The title is set by the Add or Change button The title can also be changed by selecting the charac ter string displayed on the title and clicking it again The set title becomes the menu character string when a file is added to the Play Back the Register Macro menu Macro File Name Displays the registered macro file names Shortcut Displays the shortcut keys set in the macro file The shortcut keys are set on the Tool menu gt Customize Keyword tab Function buttons Function Enables the specified items and closes the dialog box Lowers the selected macro to the position directly below Add Opens the Add the Macro file dialog box to add a new macro Up to 32 macros can be regis tered Change Opens the Change the Macro file dialog box to change the contents of the macro selected from the entry macro list Deletes the selected macro User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 369 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to add a macro file for macro registration Figure 6 107 Add the Macro file Dialog Box Add the Macro file E Program_Files HEC _tool Macro a gt Look in E Macro Meee Files of type Macro File Ok imc Cancel Help c Title IN enw Entry 6 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening
323. of the project group to be displayed on the Project window Up to 260 characters can be speci fied To insert a project in an existing group select the relevant group name from the drop down list If this specification is omitted the name of the project group displayed on the Project window will be set as Work space File Name without the path and extension User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 95 96 3 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Project File Name Specify the name of the file to save the project information of the newly added project Up to 255 characters can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name The extension of the file is prj which is appended automatically when the extension is omitted In addition if an existing project file name is specified the existing project file will be renamed as backup file e g test prj gt test prj bak after the Next gt button is clicked Then the message dialog box whether to create a new project file will be displayed Project Folder Specify the folder to save the project file of the newly added project Selecting the Browse button opens the Browse for Folder dialog box in which to specify the project folder posi tion Project Title Specify the project title to be displayed in the Project window Up to 260 characters can be specified If this specification is omitted the project title will be set as the project file name without the path
324. off 5 5 4 Displaying the build bar Selecting the View menu gt Build Bar toggles the build bar between on and off 5 5 5 Displaying the option bar Selecting the View menu gt Option Bar toggles the option bar between on and off 5 5 6 Displaying the external tool bar Selecting the View menu gt Ex tool Bar toggles the external tool bar between on and off 5 5 7 Displaying the status bar Selecting the View menu gt Status Bar toggles the status bar between on and off 5 5 8 Displaying the Project window Selecting the View menu gt Project Window toggles the Project window between on and off 5 5 9 Displaying the Output window Selecting the View menu gt Output Window toggles the Output window between on and off 88 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 5 10 Displaying an object as contents or icon Selecting the View menu gt Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon toggles the display format of an embedded object between contents and icon When an object displayed as contents is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Icon Selecting this menu item causes the object to be displayed as an icon When an object displayed as an icon is selected this menu item is displayed as Display Object as Content Selecting this menu item causes the object to be displayed as contents 5 5 11 Displaying all objects as contents Select
325. og box This dialog box is used to change a comment mark for a specified file Figure 6 19 Set Comment Mark Dialog Box set Comment Mark a gt Comment K lt Me gt Cancel Only Use less than 16 Characters ddi Help h The Case of String Between Comment start Mark and Comment End Mark PM plus Inserts String into fie This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Original Mark or Setting button in the Change Selected Source File Name dialog box Select the Original Mark or Setting button in the Change Selected Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area a Comment Specify the symbol to be used as a comment mark as well as s Function buttons OK Enables the specified comment mark This button is invalid until a character is entered in Comment Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 205 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Print dialog box This dialog box is used to print the contents of the window being edited Figure 6 20 Print Dialog Box DKI MICROLINE S0 PSII4F 0000 Boneia Status Ready Type OF MICAOLINE 602RS1I F Where LPT Comment Line Number d Print Line Numbers r Renumber Cne filmer nevenn leh aver Print Range fe All Selection C Caret Line and L
326. oject and then open the workspace project again and set the device name 4 Function buttons Device Install Starts the device file installer to register a new device file Sets the project information on the currently active project Does not enable the specified items and closes this dialog Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 261 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Source File tab This tab specifies the source file information on the active project Figure 6 46 Project Settings Dialog Box Source File Tab Project Settings 1 Source Files This area displays the names of the source files set in the active project in build order including the relative path starting from the project folder Up to 2 048 source files can be registered Caution If the compiler and assembler are not installed source file addition is not possible Executing make assembles compiles the source files in the order displayed in the source file list in accor dance with the program type The path of the project folder is used for the path name of a source file during make In addition the linking order depends on the linker of the series used 262 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Function buttons Button Function Add Opens Add Source Files dialog box to add the source file to the project Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution To transf
327. oject manager PM which is the conventional integrated development environ ment platform and a screen editor idea L The terms used for PM plus are defined below User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Workspace A workspace is the unit which manages the file name of multiple project files PM plus saves the file names of multiple project files into a workspace file prw and refers to it Project A project is a unit managed by PM plus It indicates an application system developed under PM plus and its envi ronment PM plus saves the information such as the source files target device name tool options for creating a load module and editor or debugger to be used for the application system into each project file prj as project information and refers to it Build or debug is performed in project units Therefore the project to be built or debugged have to be set as active project by selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project Project group Multiple registered projects can be arranged with related projects in a group Note that each project to be registered in a project group must target a common device i e only one device file can be assigned to a project group Figure 1 1 shows the image of the Main window Figure 1 1 Main Window Workspace eit PH plus Sample_prw OutPut File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help wiles a main
328. ol bar and so on Opens the Customize dialog box Starts and stops recording of the key operations Plays back the currently recorded key operations Saves the recorded key operations to a macro file Opens the Save the Key Operation dialog box Loads the macro file to which the key operations have been saved and enables a use of Play Back menu item Opens the Load the Macro File dialog box Loads the macro file to which the key operations have been saved and executes the key operations Opens the Play back the Macro File dialog box Registers the macro file and adds to the cascade menu of the Play Back the Register Macro Opens the Entry Macro Files dialog box Executes the macro registered with the Register the Macro Files User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Window menu File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Split To the Nest Split Window Windows List 1 Project indo w 2 OutPut Cascade Overlaps all the currently open windows with one another in such a way that their titles are visible Title Horizontally Tiles all the currently open windows horizontally Title Vertically Tiles all the currently open windows vertically Split Splits the currently active Edit window into two To the Next Split Window Moves the caret from the split screen to which the caret is positioned to column 1 of the other split sc
329. om the tag jump destination to the window from which the tag jump was made Continues the search for the line in tag jump format Continues the search for the line in tag jump format upward from a tag jump that has been made Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 147 148 One Word Right One Word Left One Line Up One Line Down One Character Right One Character Left Direct Search CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the caret position rightward by one word Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position leftward by one word Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position upward by one line Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Moves the caret position downward by one line Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the
330. on buttons Open Changes the stored contents of the specified macro file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 373 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE dump8s50 dialog box This dialog box is used to activate the dump command dump850 The analysis results are saved under project file name dmp and displayed in the Edit window The execution of dump850 can be stopped by pressing the ESC key This dialog box is displayed only when a project using a V850 Series device is active Refer to the CA850 compiler package user s manual for details on dump850 Figure 6 109 dump8g50 Dialog Box Ok Cancel ES vol test a out ddil Help b z Dump the object file E vop test test o This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt dump850 Explanation of each area a Dump the load module file This button is selected when a load module file is to be dumped default The analysis target files are the load module file of the currently active project The file name out to be generated is displayed in the edit box 374 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Dump the object file This button is selected when an object file is to be dumped The analysis target files are the object files generated by t
331. on of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Edit menu gt Grouping by Keyword Explanation of each area a Find What Specify a character string to be used as a keyword of grouping Multiple character strings can be specified by plac ing a semicolon between the character strings The word at the caret position is displayed by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for grouping is displayed If grouping is being performed for the first time this area is left blank Up to ten of the latest search keys are stored 214 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Conditions AND Search Collects lines having all the character strings specified in Find What OR Search Collects lines having any of the character strings default c Paragraph Yes Collects lines in units of paragraph If a collected line has a lower layer the line is collected with the lower layer included as is No Collects lines including the specified character string regardless of the paragraph default The definitions of paragraph are as follows Beginning of a paragraph Line preceded by a blank or a higher layer End of a paragraph Line followed by a blank or a higher layer d After Grouping Change Color Displays the collected lines in blue default Delete Deletes the collected lines from the original positions If Yes is selected in Paragraph the
332. on were set at the same time When an IDL file the target of replacement specify only IDL files E1201 s The file extension was wrong Please change the file extension When setting Of Type during global replacement an extension other than the global replacement target exten sions was set s indicates the specified extension Specify a target extension and execute global replacement E1202 s Cannot specify the wild card for the file without extension When setting Of Type during global replacement wildcards were specified instead of extensions s indi cates the specified extension Execute without specifying wildcards E1400 The file extension is not PRW PRuJ The specified workspace file has an extension other than prw Specify the file with a prw or prj extension and execute E1401 The workspace file name not specified Please enter it The workspace file name is not specified Specify a workspace file name and execute E1402 The project file name not specified Please enter it The project file name is not specified Specify a project file name and execute E1403 s The file already exists Please enter other file name An existing file name was specified s indicates the specified file name Specify another file name and execute again E1404 s The file was not specified the device Do you wish to specify it You can specify it with Project Settings command after this time No device
333. ons When an other file name is selected Add Other Files Deletes Other Files Open Open with Editor Compiler Options Assembler Options Properties file folder or the other file name displays the following menus Opens the Add Other Files dialog box Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Add Other Files dialog box Deletes a selected file from the Other Files folder Starts up an application in accordance with the file association Opens a selected file under the set editor Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 171 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Memo tab The Memo tab displays the memo information specified for a workspace Figure 6 6 Project Window Memo Tab Project indow OF x The contents of the memo can be added with the right mouse button Add Memo Opens the Add New Memo dialog box Records the contents of the memo with the date onto the Memo tab Delete Memo Deletes a selected memo 172 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the Project window The operation differs depending on whether or not the workspace is open When not opening a workspace When dropp
334. ools The Tool menu includes items for starting up the external tools registered with the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool The arguments at startup and the current folder are based on those set in the Register External Tool dialog box 5 8 7 Comparing files Selecting the Tool menu gt File Compare opens the File Compare dialog box in which the contents of the selected Edit window can be compared 5 8 8 Inserting device file Selecting the Tool menu gt Device File Installer starts up the device file installer DFINST If there is no corresponding device file download the applicable file from the following web site http www necel com micro ods eng tool DeviceFile list html This download site can also be accessed by selecting the Help menu gt NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web 5 8 9 Setting environment Selecting the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings opens PM plus Settings dialog box in which the environment of PM plus can be set The following environment settings are available Options related to workspace External editors File related items Source files generated by idl files Window size and position Path related items Editing related items Window display Layer related items Edit window related items Search replace related items 5 8 10 Setting font Selecting the Tool menu gt Font opens the Font dialog box in which the type and size of th
335. or Key Board Macro no menu Insert character insert lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters independently of insert overwrite mode Overwrite character overwrite lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters independently of insert overwrite mode Enter character input lt character string gt lt character string gt Specify the character string with Caution Inserts characters dependently of insert overwrite mode Input mode can be switched between insertmode overwritemode over writeswitch etc Enter new line insertreturn count count Specify an input count default is 1 Begin select beginsel Caution After executing beginsel execute a character move command or line move command to specify a range End select endsel Caution Releases the range selection mode set by beginsel Enter backspace backspace count count Specify an input count default is 1 Fast caret up upfast count count Specify a movement count default is 1 Fast caret down downfast count count Specify a movement count default is 1 Insert mode insertmode Overwrite mode overwritemode Edit window selection window lt window name gt readonly ReadOnly No lt window name gt Specify the file name of the Edit window with full path If the file name is not determi
336. ored and can be selected from the dorp down list User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 295 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the Output window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 296 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Select Project dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the project to be added when a source file is dragged to the Project window while a workspace file or project file is open Figure 6 65 Select Project Dialog Box Select Project a m Please choose a project which adds the source file s Serva Control mair Serva Control ServoLibrary Open Source File Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Drag and drop a new source file to the Project window Explanation of each area a Project selection area Select the project which registers the source file The project group and project names in the currently open project are displayed by default User s Manual U16934EJ1 VOUM CHAPTER 6
337. ose the Project Group Name dialog box with the OK button without setting a project group name Set a project group name in the Project Group Name dialog box E1410 This project group name is using Please enter other project group names A name that had already been used in the workspace was set in the Project Group Name dialog box and the OK button was clicked Set a character string that is not currently being used as a project group name E1411 s This file cannot edit The Open command was selected for a non editable project related file s indicates the file name Select an editable file with the Open command E1412 The device file information cannot be found in project file It does not show the device file version The device file information could not be found in the project file E1413 Cannot add the file s to the project because of the wrong extension The extension specified a file name that was not applicable to a source file s indicates the specified file name Change the extension and try again E1414 Cannot add the file s to the project because of the wrong extension Do you wish to continue to add source files The extension specified a file name that was not applicable to a source file s indicates the specified file name Change the extension and try again E1415 The file s has already set The specified file has already been set for a source file s indicates the specified file name Rena
338. ository CVS Log dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS log command for the selected file and display the file s log contents in the Output window CVS Status dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS status command for the selected file and display the file s status in the Output window Select Project dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the project to be added when a source file is dragged to the Project window while a work space file or project file is open rebuild and set the build sequence Add Command dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the commands used to exe cute any processing required before or after build copying of output files to another folder etc Edit Command dialog box This dialog box is used to edit commands specified as required processing either during build execution before or after build processing Debugger Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the details of the debugger to be used Register External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to register add change and delete external tools to be used Up to 10 tools can be registered The currently set tools are displayed Select External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a external tool to be used File Compare dialog box This dialog box is used to compare the contents of two Edit windows PM plus Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to make vari
339. oup was specified Register the project in an existing project group E1426 s This file has already specified as the startup file Do you wish to continue to add source files An attempt was made to add a file specified at startup as a linker option s indicates the name of the file attempted to be added This message is displayed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project E1427 A project cannot be registered into this workspace any more Please delete an unnecessary project or register the project into the other workspace Registration of a number of projects exceeding the maximum number 128 of projects that can be registered to a workspace was attempted Add the projects after deleting the unnecessary ones Or add the projects to a different workspace E1500 Cannot exit PM plus while a build is in progress Select the Stop Build command before exit PM plus An attempt was made to close PM plus during build Cancel build before closing PM plus E1501 Cannot exit PM plus while make file creating An attempt was made to close PM plus while a make file was being created Cancel make file creation before closing PM plus E1502 Failed to execute build Make sure that compiler and assembler was installed correctly Build could not be started up The compiler or assembler is likely to have been installed incorrectly Check that the compiler or the assembler is installed correctly E1503 s Failed to start up
340. ource file dialog box This dialog box is used to make a jump to a specified destination line number in a specified source file Figure 6 30 Jump to Specified Line in the Source file Dialog Box Jump to Specified Line in the Source file a ee lite We MAING fi Cancel _ Help l This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Find menu gt To a Specific Line in the Source file Explanation of each area a File name Specify a destination file name If the active window has source files the drop down list sequentially lists the source file names If the active win dow does not have a source file a text file etc the drop down list displays only the file name b Line No Specify a destination line number If a value exceeding the highest line number of the file is specified a jump is made to the last line c Display with Path This check box specifies the display of File name Checked Displays the file name with the path Not checked Displays the file name only default User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 231 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Makes a jump to the specified line Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 232 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Mark Jump dialog box This dialog
341. ous environment settings User Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to set arbitrary keywords for the smart lookup function Font dialog box This dialog box is used to select the type and size of charac ters to be displayed in the Edit window Customize dialog box This dialog box is used to set the options of keyboard menu toolbar user menu keyword User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 135 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Name Dialog Box Name Contents Edit User keyword dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords defined by the user to highlight arbitrary character strings Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box This dialog box is used to edit the keywords for highlighting of reserved words in C language Save the Key Operation dialog box This dialog box is used to save the recorded key operation ina file Load the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read a saved macro file Play back the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read the key operation from a saved macro file and execute the macro Add the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to add a macro file for macro registra tion Change the Macro file dialog box This dialog box is used to change the stored contents of a macro file dump8s50 dialog box This dialog box is used to activate the dump command dump8s50 Window List dialog box This dialog box is used to list the widows that are currently open Shortcut List dialog box Th
342. ower Layer Fal e C p Laver Font Courter Mew I Print with Indentation size 10 pont T Print Laver Marks Change Font M Print Collapse Layers Other f C Insert New Page Code at T Enable multiple lines print every at Layers Print Header Footer Print Until Te Laver 1 127 Heee aia cares tee This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Print Select the Print button on the File menu gt Print Preview 206 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Printer Name Select the printer to be used from the drop down list The name of the printer specified as the default printer is displayed by default Properties Change the printer settings if necessary b Print Range All Prints all of the contents of the window Selection Prints the selected portion in the window Caret Line and Lower Layer Prints a line and subsequent lower layer lines at the caret position c Layer Print with Indentation Print Layer Marks Print Collapse Layers Insert New Page Code at every 1st Layers Print Until x Layer 1 127 d Line Number Print Line Numbers Renumber Line Numbers in every 1st Layer Prints lower layers with indent aligning a first line of the selected range with the left end The number of space charac ters for the indent is s
343. ox This dialog box is used to set options when a source file is saved The settings made in this dialog box have the same meaning as the settings made on the Source File by idl file tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box The default settings correspond to the settings in the PM plus Settings dialog box The settings here are also reflected in the PM plus Settings dialog box Figure 6 15 Save Source Files Options Dialog Box Save Source Files Options Layer Indent Uk Cancel C Replace Tab C Replace Space f Wot Replace 6 F Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File Help x ok Ee H This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Save As and click the Source File Name Option button Explanation of each area a Layer Indent This area specifies whether an indent for a layer is replaced with a specified character when a source file is saved No Replace The indent of layers is not replaced Replace Tab The indent of one layer is replaced with one Tab code Replace Space The indent of one layer is replaced with the number of space codes specified with Indent Tab Characters on the View tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box Not Replace The indents to the specified layer are not replaced with Tab or space codes If 2 is specified the lines of the first and second layers ar
344. ox User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 381 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 1 Display Format The messages output by PM plus are displayed in the message dialog box shown in Figure 7 1 There are four kinds of messages When a message is displayed a letter indicating the message type is prefixed to the message number The meaning of each message type is shown in Table 7 1 Figure 7 1 Message Dialog Box PH plus FF0118 Failed to read the project file Make sure that a this file has broken Table 7 1 The Meaning of each Message Type Explanation Eatal Error This indicates a fatal error Operating Error This message is displayed when an operating error occurred and execution is not possible This message is displayed when some kind of choice is required for the operation 1 Information This message is displayed to report some kind of information 382 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 7 2 List of Fatal Error Messages The fatal error messages output by PM plus are listed below together the cause and action to take in response to the message in message number order All fatal error messages have F prefixed to the message number F0001 Memory is not enough Please terminate other applications Memory could not be secured Close other applications to free up memory F0002 Failed to initialize Object Linking and Embedding The object library DLL could not be read at startup Since the OS is
345. p 81 148 One Word Left 81 148 One Word Right 80 148 Replace 73 146 Replace in Files 77 147 Same Layer Line Down 75 147 Some Layer Line Up 75 147 Tag Jump 79 147 Toa Specific Line 73 To the End of File 74 147 To the End of Line 73 147 To the Function Definition 76 147 To the Index Line 74 147 To the Matching Brace 76 147 To the Specific Line 146 To the Specific Line in the Source file 73 147 To the Tag File 80 147 To the Top Layer at caret 74 147 To the Top of File 74 147 To the Top of Line 73 147 Find Downward 72 146 Find in Files 76 147 Find in Files dialog box 235 Find in Project 78 147 Find menu 146 Find String dialog box 220 Find the Word Downward 73 146 Find the Word Upward 72 146 Find Upward 72 146 Font 117 156 Font dialog box 348 Font dialog box Print 209 Function List 88 151 Function List dialog box 251 Functions 25 G GENERAL 23 Grouping by Keyword 71 144 Grouping by Keyword dialog box 214 H Help 158 About PM plus 132 158 NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web 131 158 PM plus Help 131 158 Shortcut List 131 158 Help Functions 131 Help menu 158 History of files 65 424 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM History of the workspaces 65 Host machine 27 C1 idea L 23 IDL File 24 Image
346. pecified with Indent Characters on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Layer tab Prints specified layer marks as well Prints currently collapsed layers as well Prints the contents Inserting a new page code for each first layer Prints the contents for up to the specified layer Prints line numbers at the left end Renumbers lines from 1 for each layer 1 line e Font Font The font type to be used is displayed Size The font size to be used is displayed f Other Enable multiple lines print Enables multi line printing Print Header Footer Prints the headers or footers User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 207 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Change Fort Opens the Font dialog box Print in which a desired font type can be specified Header Footer Opens the Set Header Footer dialog box in which the contents of the header and footer can be specified When the Print Header Footer check box is not checked this button becomes invalid Opens the Print Preview window 208 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Font dialog box Print This dialog box is used to specify the font and size of the characters to be printed Figure 6 21 Font Dialog Box Print LAaBbY yee Cancel Help This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Change Font button in the Print dialo
347. pening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File menu gt Open Explanation of each area a Look in Select the drive or folder in which the specified file exists from the drop down list The files existing in the specified location are displayed in area below User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 187 b c 188 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE File name and Files of type File name Specify the name of the file to be opened Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name The file name can be directly entered in the text box or can be selected from the list above Files of type Select the type of the specified file from the drop down list The following types are dis played in the default condition When opening a workspace file Source Files Caution The source file extension corresponding to the currently active project is displayed Include Files h inc idea L Files idl Text Files txt All Files When not opening a workspace file Source Files c cpp asm s Include Files h inc idea L Files idl Text Files txt All Files If a file whose extension is bkl is selected it is identified as a backup file File types user specified extension etc can be added with the Tool menu gt Customize Open as read only The specified file is opened as a read only attribute Apply Laye
348. perations Selecting the Tool menu gt Save the Key Operations opens the Save the Key Operation dialog box in which the recorded key operations can be saved to a file The extension of the file macro fle in which the operations are saved is imc 5 8 15 Commands corresponding to key operations When the recorded key operations are saved the command corresponding to each key operation is described ina macro file imc The macro file is text file and can therefore be referenced or modified Addition is also possible in accordance with the prescribed format The formats of the commands describable in macro files as follows 118 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION How to read command format lt gt indicates an argument that cannot be omitted and indicates an argument that can be omitted indicates selection of either side Table 5 2 Command Format for Key Board Macro File menu New newfile idl idl Creates new idl file Open openfile lt filename gt readonly layer autoselect sjis euc jis unicode filename Specify the file name with full path readonly Opens the file as a read only file layer Reads the file with layer rule autoselect Detects automatically sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Insert file insertfile lt filenam
349. play Window BF main E W650_test test c Untitled gt E Wagi test testil c a t EYAD testytesti cl21 void maintvoid tk 1 files were searched EOF This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button Drag and drop function Opening Select the Find menu gt Find in Files Select the Find menu gt Find in Project Explanation of each area a Search results display area This area displays the results of the search Operations performed by double clicking the mouse button Double clicking a line without a lower layer will tag jump to the corresponding place in the Edit window Double clicking a line with a lower layer will follow the setting on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab On the Edit tab either of the following can be selected Expands a collapsed layer or collapses an expanded layers Selects a word User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 183 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Drag and drop function The following operations are achieved by dropping a file in the Search result display window When dropping a workspace file prw extension Opens the dropped workspace If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace that was dropped Multiple workspace files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dro
350. plus Settings tab 5 10 7 Starting up a external help 2 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 2 starts up the help specified with External HELP 2 Ctrl F1 area on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings tab 5 10 8 Starting up a external help 3 Selecting the Help menu gt External HELP 3 starts up the help specified with External HELP 3 Shift Ctrl F1 area on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 131 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 10 9 Displaying the version information about PM plus Selecting the Help menu gt About PM plus displays the version information about PM plus When a project file is opened the version information about NEC Electronics tools and device files that are corresponding to the project is also displayed 132 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 1 Window Composition PM plus has the following windows and dialog boxes Table 6 1 Window Dialog Box List Contents Window Name Dialog Box Name Main window This window is the first window to be opened after PM plus is started To use PM plus start operation from this window Project window This window is used to display various information on the projects currently opened Edit window This window is used to edit Source programs Search result display window This window is used to display the results of search Output window Thi
351. position Deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the beginning of the line Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Deletes the portion of the line from the caret position to the end of the line Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the word at the caret position with the range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the left of the caret position with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the portion of the word at the caret position that is to the right of the caret position with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Selects the portion of the line from the caret position to the beginning of the li
352. pped together When dropping a project file prj extension Opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped If another workspace is already open closes that workspace and then opens the workspace corresponding to the project file that was dropped Multiple project files cannot be dropped A workspace file and project file cannot be dropped together When dropping a file other than a workspace file or project file Opens the file that was dropped in the Edit window If Untitled1 exists in the Edit window while the Output window is not displayed Untitled1 is closed when the file that was dropped is opened Multiple files can be dropped 184 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Output window The Output window displays the execution status of the make file during build processing On second and subsequent opens this window re displays the status when the window was exited previously Regarding the execution status error lines and warning lines are displayed in red and blue respectively Figure 6 10 Output Window OutPut O x CHENECToolsav bin cabbll exe cpu 3001 Fs Fw g c testl ct This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Tag Jump function Operations performed with the right mouse button Drag and drop function Opening Select the menu item that perform build or compile processing from the Build menu
353. previously search key this area is left blank The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Find What on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Replace With This area specifies a replacement character string The last specified replacement character string is displayed by default If no replacement has been made this area is left blank The setting of the search key s can be changed by the status of Show String You Selected or Word of Caret Position to Replace With on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab o Files specification area 1 Of Type This area specifies the name of the file to be searched The wild card can also be used for file names but not for the extensions Note that files with the following exten sions cannot be specified exe com dll ocx hlp fnc lib illb okKl okm idm bak dat cab sys ini vxd inf 1zh zip sdb plg xrf orn Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Multiple file names can be specified by separating them with a semicolon However a file with idl extension cannot be specified in multiple Folder This area specifies the folder to be searched A desired folder can be directly input or can be changed by clicking the button to open the Select Folder dia log box After selecting a folder in this dialog
354. processing tools during compilation are output to a log file and displayed on the Output window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg 112 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 7 4 Building Selecting the Build menu gt Build starts up a set of language tools assembler C compiler and link commands for the active project With Build menu item source files are built only when the time stamp is updated after the source files and their dependent files have been scanned The make file is created during build in default condition under the name project file name mak This make file is updated during build by default if options and other settings are changed The messages output form the language processing tools during build are output to a log file and displayed on the Out put window The log file is created in the project folder under the name project file name plg To stop build select the Build menu gt Stop Build Caution In Project Manager V3 xx if the Build menu item is executed while the debugger is activated a load module file is downloaded automatically but in PM plus a load module file is not downloaded To perform batch processing from build to download use the Build and Debug menu item 5 7 5 Stopping build If Build menu gt Stop Build is selected during build execution build processing is stopped If Build menu
355. quipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under ce
356. r 5 6 8 CVS status Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Status executes the CVS status command for the selected file and displays the status of the file on the Output window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 109 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 6 9 CVS comparison Selecting the Project menu gt CVS Diff executes the CVS comparison command for the selected file and compares that file with the previous version The comparison result is displayed on the Output window The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 5 6 10 Exporting a make file Selecting the Project menu gt Export Makefile creates a make file corresponding to the currently active project When a make file is created a parameter file dependent on the language product may be created for the language pro cessing program Therefore the created file will differ depending on the series to be used The make file is created under the name Project file name mak If a make file already exists it is overwritten 5 6 11 Setting project informat
357. r Mark at Top of Line area on the Tool menu gt PM Setting Layer tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 83 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 4 3 Expanding or collapsing one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand Collapse expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is posi tioned or the line selected with range selection if it is collapsed and collapses it if expanded When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the caret line is positioned to the top of the screen 5 4 4 Expanding one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Expand expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection When a lower layer is expanded if not all of the lines with the expanded lower layer can be displayed the screen will be scrolled so that the caret line is positioned to the top of the screen Note that Expand menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Figure 5 16 Expanding One of the Lower Layers BF Untitled Changed Select the Layer menu gt Expand 5 4 5 Collapsing one of the lower layers Selecting the Layer menu gt Collapse collapses one of the lower layers of the line to w
358. r Rule The specified file is read applying a specified layer rule If Apply Layer Rule in Opening File s is checked on the File tab in the PM plus Settings dialog box this check box is checked automatically and dimmed The Layer Rule button can only be valid when Apply Layer Rule check box is checked Refer to the Set Layer Rule dialog box for details on the layer rule User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Example Opening a file without checking the check box if value 0 123 pao else if walue 0 456 pL else p Hl Opening a file with checking the check box 2 if walue 0 129 PHO I 2 else if walue O02454 T p l 2 else p 1 Hl e Gather Files into an Edit Window Multiple specified files are read into one Edit window When this check box is checked Open as read only check box becomes invalid Function buttons Open Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Layer Rule Opens the Set Layer Rule dialog box In the Set Layer Rule dialog box the layer rule to be applied when reading a file can be set User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 189 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Insert File dialog box This dialog box is used to insert the contents of a specified file to the current caret position in the active Edit window The contents of the file
359. r the line Expand Collapse Expand Collapse Expand All Lower Layers Expand All Collapse All Expand the Specific Layer Collapse the Specific Layer Show Index 1 Show Index 2 selected with range selection by one Expands Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Expands one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is posi tioned or the line selected with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Collapses one of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is positioned or the line selected with range selection Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Expands all of the lower layers of the line to which the current caret is posi tioned or the line selected with range selection Expands all of the layers in the active Edit window Collapses all of the layers in the active Edit window Expands a specified number of layers Opens the Expand to Specified Layer dialog box Collapses a specified number of layers Opens the Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box Collapses lower layers and displays the
360. r was a network path s indicates the specified folder name Specified the folder other than the network path E1033 s Cannot use the network path Do you wish to continue to add source files The specified folder was a network path s indicates the specified folder name This message is displayed when multiple source files are selected and added to a project Specified the folder other than the network path E1035 Two or more workspace files or project files cannot be dropped Multiple workspace files and project files were dropped in a main frame or the Edit window If dropping a workspace or project in a main frame or the Edit window specify only one such item E1036 A workspace is not opened during user program execution Please open a workspace after stopping a program An attempt was made to drop and open a workspace during user program execution Stop the user program via the debugger and open a workspace again E1037 The addition of a project cannot be performed during user program execution An attempt was made to drop and add a project file during user program execution Stop the user program via the debugger and add a project file again 394 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES E1100 This object cannot edit An attempt was made to edit a non editable object E1200 Cannot specify the extension IDL and the other extensions When setting Of Type during global replacement IDL and another extensi
361. rce file dialog box 231 Mark Jump dialog box 233 Find in Files dialog box 235 Replace in Files dialog box 240 Expand to Specified Layer dialog box 245 Collapse to Specified Layer dialog box 247 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 15 Set Layer Rule dialog box 248 Function List dialog box 251 Save the Function List dialog box 254 Layer List dialog box 256 select Active Project dialog box 258 Project Settings dialog box 259 Insert Project dialog box 264 Add Source Files dialog box 266 Project Group Name dialog box 268 Project Title dialog box 269 Add Project Related Files dialog box 270 Add Other Files dialog box 272 Properties dialog box 274 Add New Memo dialog box 276 Startup File dialog box 277 Copy Startup File from dialog box 279 Startup File to register dialog box 281 Link Directive File dialog box 283 Copy Link Directive File from dialog box 285 Link Directive File to register dialog box 287 CVS Update dialog box 289 CVS Commit dialog box 291 CVS Log dialog box 293 CVS Status dialog box 295 Select Project dialog box 297 Batch Build dialog box 299 Build Mode dialog box 301 Add Build Mode dialog box 303 Build Settings dialog box 305 Add Command dialog box 310 Edit Command dialog box 311 Debugger Settings dialog box 313 Register External Tool dialog box 316 Select Ex
362. reen To the Next Window Activates the window following the currently active one according to Z order window superposition order Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab To the Previous Window Activates the window preceding the currently active one according to Z order window superposition order Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab Window List Displays a list of currently open windows Opens the Window List dialog box Open window information Displays the window title of the window currently being edited and makes the selected window the top window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 157 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 10 Help menu File Edit Tool Help PM plus Help Main Window Current Window Shortcut List NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web External HELP 1 External HELP 2 External HELP 3 About PM plus Find Laver View Project Build Tool Window Help ID B50 SMe50 Compiler Operation C Language Assembly Language About CASS PM plus Help Main Window Current Window F1 Shortcut List NEC Electronics Microprocessor Web External ABR Stilts Eternal HELE Z Eti tE Etema HELE S Etits rier About Pe plus
363. ries me oe the Structured Assembler Options dialog box V850 Series Ts Table 6 5 Option Bar V850 Series Function Opens the Compiler Common Options dialog box Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Linker Options dialog box Opens the ROM processor Options dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 161 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Hex Converter Options dialog box Opens the Section File Generator Options dialog box d External tool bar The external tool bar consists of the icons that are registered with the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool The order of display of the icons depends on the order registered with Register Ex tool menu item Window display area This area is displayed various windows For details on the function of each window refer to the following Project window Edit window Search result display window Output window Status bar The status bar displays brief description of the menu that has been activated by clicking and indicates the other various information Figure 6 3 shows an image of the status bar Figure 6 3 Status Bar Start build S JIS CRLF Lio 4 a 6 c d e f 9 a Brief description Displays the following descriptions The description of the menu that has been activated by clicking The contents of the line corresponding to a tag jump destination
364. riginal file cannot be opened or disk space may be not enough or the other process may be using the destination file Copy from s1 Copy to s2 Failed to copy the file s1 indicates the name of the file to be the copy source and s2 indicates the name of the file to be the copy destination Check whether there is a Read attribute in the file to be the copy source If there is no attribute assign the Read attribute and execute again Free up disk space Check if the file is being used by another application If the file is being used by another application close the application and execute again F0131 Failed to remove the file Make sure that this file is read only or the other process using this file The file could not be deleted when the Clean command on the Build menu was executed The Output window indicates the file name that could not be deleted Check whether the file displayed in the Output window has the Read Only attribute or is used in another process and if required cancel the Read Only attribute or close the other applications that use this file FO200 Failed to make the edit window Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application The Edit window could not be created because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0201 Cannot open any more window Please close other window An attempt was made to open more than 64 Edit
365. ring to be searched is set ocWork gt dwiInfo pcWork dwIinfo OLE_BIT The character string to be searched is set pcWork dwinfo Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding If this check box is checked character strings searched directly are added to the candidate character strings in the Find String dialog box default If it is not checked character strings searched directly are not added to the candidate character strings 2 Warning for Find Replace This area sets the operation mode when a character string cannot be found Beep Sound If this check box is checked a beep sound is output when the search finishes This can be set when the Beep Warning Sound check box on the Edit tab is checked Display Messages If this check box is checked a message is displayed when the search finishes 3 Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 345 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE User Setting dialog box This dialog box is used to set arbitrary keywords for the smart lookup function The dialog box consists of two pages and up to 64 keywords can be set The keywords set in this dialog box can be saved as a keyword file A keyword file is a text file and can be edited easily with an arbitrary editor Figure 6 93 User Setting Dialog Box User Setting a k
366. rmine NEC Electronics willingness to support a given application Note 1 NEC Electronics as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries 2 NEC Electronics products means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics as defined above M8E 02 11 1 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Regional Information Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country Before using any NEC Electronics product in your application please contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors They will verify e Device availability e Ordering information e Product release schedule e Availability of related technical literature e Development environment specifications for example specifications for third party tools and components host computers power plugs AC supply voltages and so forth e Network requirements In addition trademarks registered trademarks export restrictions and other legal issues may also vary from country to country GLOBAL SUPPORT http www necel com en support support html NEC Electronics America Inc U S NEC Electronics Europe GmbH NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd Santa Clara California Duesseldorf Germany Hong Kong Tel 408 588 6000 Tel 0211 65030 Tel 2886 9318 800 366 9782 e Sucursal en Espana NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd
367. ronics V2 52 or later ID78K4 NS NEC Electronics V2 52 or later Simulator SM78KO NEC Electronics V2 52 or later SM78KOS NEC Electronics V2 52 or later SM78K4 NEC Electronics V2 52 or later Device File A device file of target device to be used NEC Electronics Note The listed version number is the preliminary version number because the tool is still under development Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 21 28 V850 Series Compiler Debugger Simulator Performance AnalysisTuning Tool Device File CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CA850 NEC Electronics V2 70 or later ID850 NEC Electronics V2 52 or later SM850 NEC Electronics V2 51 or later TW850 NEC Electronics V1 20 or later A device file of target device to be used NEC Electronics User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 1 Installing PM plus PM plus is included with an assembler package RA78Kx or a compiler package CA850 When RA78Kx or CA850 are installed PM plus can be also installed if necessary as it is supplied in the same package For the details on how to install the assembler package or the compiler package refer to the user s manual of each tool 2 2 Uninstalling PM plus 1 Click Add Remove Program icon in Windows control panel and select the following item from the list displayed NEC PM plus Vx xx 2 Click the Add Remove button Add Remove Programs Properties Ei ES Install Uninstall
368. roperties dialog box This dialog box is used to displays the path information and read attribute of the selected file Add New Memo dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new memo Startup File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file when an exist ing file is used as a startup file Copy Startup File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a startup file Startup File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a startup file to register 134 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Window Name Dialog Box Name Contents Link Directive File dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Copy Link Directive File from dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file to be a copy source when an existing file is copied and used as a link directive file Link Directive File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file CVS Update dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS update command for the selected file and acquire files registered in the reposi tory CVS Commit dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflect the file in the rep
369. rs internally used by the CAS50 As a result of unused registers the registers not used by the CAS50 can be used for the application programin assembly language and the overhead required for saving and restoring registers can be reduced Though the variables allocated to registers by the C compiler may be reduced Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 22 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 22 register mode 2 26 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 26 register mode 3 932 Register Mode The startup file is determined as the 32 register mode 48 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Caution If the register mode of the compiler option is changed after a new workspace is created the quasi directive indi cating the register mode in the startup file may indicate a different mode from the register mode of the other source files Therefore execute the relevant processing measure from those shown below Modify the quasi directive that indicates the register mode in the startup file as follows In 22 register mode register mode In 32 register mode Delete option reg _mode line Ignore the following warning displayed at linking Id850 W4608 input file have different register modes use rc option for more information User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 49 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION New Workspace St
370. rtain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electron
371. s 65 History of workspaces 65 Exiting PM plus 65 Edit Functions 66 Ol N Aaananananaananangaganagaanaanaaaaaaa oa CO NOOO A W N VON INS DPED IO PP oe Ns Y P o P POP PODM BP D ONM D P Ie ir W me O 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 Canceling an edit operation 66 Canceling an Undo operation 66 Cutting off character strings 67 Copying character strings 67 Cutting off character strings Cut for Append 67 Copying character strings Copy for Append 67 Copying character strings as a screen image 68 Inserting the contents of clipboard 68 Inserting the contents of clipboard with specified format Deleting character strings 69 Deleting a word 69 Deleting characters to the end of a word 69 Deleting aline 69 Deleting character strings to the top of line 69 Deleting character strings to the end of line 69 Selecting a word at the caret 70 Selecting a word to the left of the caret 70 Selecting a word to the right of the caret 70 Selecting a range to the top of line 70 Selecting a range to the end of line 70 Selecting entire contents 70 Grouping by keyword 71 Restoring color of grouping line 71 Creating function prototypes 71 Inserting a new object 71 Setting links for objects 71 Object 71 Search Functions 72 D 3 J Searching for a
372. s The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE h Edit tab This dialog box is used to make settings related to edits Figure 6 88 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Edit Tab PH plus Settings Workspace External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File Windy Path Edit YEIN Layer l Scroll FindsReplace M Select a String between DoublefSinglel Quotations as Tag Jump 1 a T Don t Move Caret as Paste Ged se Cuteadcat Double Click 2 Release Range Selected Before Jump f Layer Expand Collapse M Beep Warning Sound C Select a Word 3 r Image Copy Object 4 C Convert Indent ta Tab WM Disable object resize T Keep object when execute paste command f Convert Indent to Space W Smart Look up Function Use I Function List display Display the List at more than 5 character s I User Setup List display User Setting Cancel Help 1 Setting at the time of edit area Don t Delete The Line If it has Lower Layers If this check box is checked lines with lower layers are not deleted when the line delete command is executed default If it is not checked lines are deleted regardless of whether they have lower layers Select a String
373. s OK Selects the added build mode and returns to the Build Mode dialog box If nothing is entered under Build Mode this button cannot be selected Does not enable the settings and returns to the Build Mode dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 304 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set options related to build This settings in this dialog box are saved in the registry and become valid at the next time the project is opened The following items can be set Options during build Build tab Processing to be executed before build Pre Build Process tab Processing to be executed after build After Build Process tab Figure 6 69 Build Settings Dialog Box Build Settings This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Opening Select the Build menu gt Build Settings User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 305 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Build tab 306 This tab sets the options for executing build Figure 6 70 Build Settings Dialog Box Build Tab Build Settings Open the Log File as Build Failed When a build error occurs during build a log file is opened If an external editor is set it is displayed on the exter nal editor Stop the Batch Build as Build Faild If during batch build batch rebuild a build error occurs upon
374. s checked the subfolders of the specified folder are also searched through 3 Regular Expression only details If this box is checked regular expressions are supported in global searching Expression Description Represents the character itself X Y X or Y appears selection X appears zero or more times Same as X X X appears one or more times x Meta characters and have special meanings If any of those characters need to be searched must be used If character needs to be searched must be specified Other special characters are specified as follows Tab character t Beginning of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for End of line Valid only when specified at the beginning of a character string Otherwise character itself is searched for In regular expressions repetition concatenation and selection are assigned decreasing priorities in the stated order The priority can be adjusted by enclosing the corresponding part in parentheses and How to use regular expressions A character is a regular expression that indicates the character itself except meta characters E g a is a regular expression indicating that the character a will appear Connection XY in which the regular expressions X and Y are described in order is a regular expression indicating that X and Y will appear
375. s list box item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active Function buttons Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 315 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register External Tool dialog box This dialog box is used to register add change and delete external tools to be used Up to 10 tools can be registered The currently set tools are displayed Figure 6 76 Register External Tool Dialog Box a Menu List Ff Notepad Add Edit Cancel Remove Help Remove All Up or Tool file name CAWINDOWS Notepad exe Parameter Tool folder CAWINDOWS Meru Notepad Tool tip Notepad status bar Start Notepad This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Tool menu gt Register Ex tool 316 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Menu List The menu item names of the currently registered external tools The menu item names are the Menu String spec ified in the Select External Tool dialog box using the Add button The menu item names are displayed as a pop up menu of Start up EX tool The menu items are displayed in the order of Menu List The icons of the external tools set h
376. s window is used to display the execution status of the make file during build processing Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified file Insert File dialog box This dialog box is used to insert the contents of a specified file to the current caret position in the active Edit window Open Workspace dialog box This dialog box is used to open a specified workspace file Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the current active file into a specified file Save Source Files Options dialog box This dialog box is used to set options when a source file is saved Change Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to change the name of the source file to be created from an IDL file being edited to a specified file name Change Selected Source File Name dialog box This dialog box is used to rename the source file selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Change Selected Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to rename multiple source files selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Set Comment Mark dialog box This dialog box is used to change a comment mark for a speci fied file Print dialog box This dialog box is used to print the contents of the window being edited Font dialog box Print This dialog box is used to specify the font and size of the char acters to be printed Set Header Footer dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the contents of the head
377. sage or beep depending on the setting of Warning for Find Replace on the Tool menu gt PM Settings Find Replace tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 223 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace String dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string Figure 6 27 Replace String Dialog Box Replace String Find What main a Replace With main btr Replace Match Whole Word Only Replace All fram Top of Line Replace All Match Case This Source File Only Cancel m pee sein Help W Display Mini Dialog This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Find menu gt Replace Select the Replace button on the too bar 224 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Character strings specification area 1 Find What This area specifies the character string to be replaced A word at the caret position is displayed as the search key by default If there is no corresponding word the character string used last for searching is displayed If there is no previously search key this area is left blank Up to the ten most recently specified character strings to be replaced are stored If there are over ten character strings the oldest one will be deleted The character strings to be replaced can be saved into an IDL file by checki
378. scending order Fix Window 2 Project title name Opens the Project Group Name dialog box Opens a wizard to add a new project into the project Opens the Insert Project dialog box Displays the file names displayed in the Project window in the order in which they were registered Displays the file names displayed in the Project window in the ascending order Fixes the location of the Project window The project title is displayed If a title is not set the file name without the path and extension is displayed The project title name can be set by the user freely and up to 260 characters can be set However only up to 259 char acters can be displayed in the Project window When the mouse cursor is placed on the project title name the device name used in the projects is displayed as a pop up menu The project set as the active project is displayed as a pink icon by selecting the Project menu gt Select Active Project Clicking the right mouse button on the project title name displays the following menus Set as Active Project Build Compiler Options Assembler Options Edit Project Title Project Settings Delete Project Register order Ascending order Fix Window 166 Makes the selected project active Starts the build processing Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Project Title dialog box Opens the Project Settings dia
379. specified file as a link directive file to be the copy source Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 286 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File to register dialog box This dialog box is used to specify a link directive file when an existing file is used as a link directive file Figure 6 60 Link Directive File to register Dialog Box Link Directive File to register a Look in E VESO test E a8 Sample dir a cH e El File name Open Files of type Link directive files dir Cancel Help me Me This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the File Name button on the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Select the File Name button on the Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box Explanation of each area a Lookin Select the drive or folder that includes the link directive file to register from the drop down list b File name and Files of type Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 28 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Open Sets the specified file as a link directive file to register The specified link directive file is register
380. specifying with the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings View tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 179 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Smart lookup function The smart look up function helps users input data by displaying a list of function names after just a part of the code is written during coding To use the smart lookup function check the Smart Look up Function Use check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab a List of candidate function names The function names that match the specified number of characters are displayed Up to 1998 function name char acters can be recognized The maximum number of user registered function candidates is 64 To use this function check the Function List display check box on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab And also the number of characters is specified with the Display the List at more than xxx character s area on the same Edit tab Caution If there is only one candidate in the function name candidates list the list cannot be hidden even by pressing the Up arrow key and Down arrow key on the keyboard To hide the list press either the ESC key or the Enter key BP E V850_test test1c Changed iffst 0 break b Detailed display of functions When a is entered if the character string preceding the matches the name of an existing function the details of the function type return values and arguments are displayed
381. ster Mode dialog box Specify the register mode option for the C compiler The sample file of the startup file corresponding to the register mode which is selected in this dialog box is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files This dialog box is displayed only when V850 Series has been specified as the series name in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box and Copy and Use the Sample file has been specified in the previous wizard step Add New Project Step 3 8 Startup File dialog box Figure 5 23 Add New Project Step 4 8 Register Mode Dialog Box Add Hew Project Step 4 6 Register Mode Please select the Register Mode 1 Project Information 1 _ Soo 2 Register Mode 2 Select Real Time O5 3 Startup File 14 Register Mode 2 gt 26Fegister Mode 5 Link Directive Filef 6 Setup Source Files T Select Debugger 3 A 2 Renister Mode 8 Confirmation H V850 Series Only 2 5 According as the selected CAS50 Register Mode the sample Startup File will be copied and used The Register Mode sets the number of registers intermally used by the C4850 As a result of unused registers the registers not used by the CAS50 can be used for the application program in assembly language and the overhead required for saving and restoring registers can be reduced Though the variables allocated to registers by the C compiler may be re
382. t and smooth execution of the debug operation flow using the PM plus platform Setting the layer rule Refer to 5 4 17 Applying a layer rule Registration of external tools and customization of menu toolbars Refer to 5 8 5 Registering external tools 5 8 11 Customizing settings Word based searching in all the source files of the project Refer to 5 3 23 Searching for a character string within a project User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 3 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 1 File Management 5 1 1 Creating a new file Selecting the File menu gt New opens a new Edit window Up to 64 Edit window can be opened together with the Search result display window and the Output window 5 1 2 Opening a existing file Selecting the File menu gt Open opens the Open dialog box to open a selected file 5 1 3 Inserting a file Selecting the File menu gt Insert file opens the Insert File dialog box to insert a specified file at the caret position in the currently active Edit window The files that can be inserted are as follows A IDL file A text format file 5 1 4 Closing a window Selecting the File menu gt Close closes the file being edited If the file has been changed a message for confirming whether to save the changes Is displayed Note that if there are any files with read only having the same name those files will all be closed 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by t
383. t fiel type gt lt folder gt subfolder through multiple files word matchcase zen special source findalllayer foundlayer foundnotlayer autoselect sjis euc jis unicode lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to be searched with lt file type gt Specify the file type character string with lt folder gt Specify the folder character string with subfolder Also search sub folders word Search word matchcase Distinguishes a uppercase and lowercase character zen Distinguishes a two byte and one byte character special Regular expression source Also displays source file name findalllayer Displays all searched files with layers foundlayer Displays files in which character strings are found with layers foundnotlayer Displays files in which character strings are found without layers autoselect Detects automatically sjis Reads the files with Shift JIS codes euc Reads the files with EUC codes jis Reads the files with JIS codes unicode Reads the files with Unicode Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 121 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Find in Files When searching grepedit lt Character string to be searched gt word matchcase zen spe through the current edit window cial source findalllayer foundlayer foundnotlayer autoselect sjis euc jis unicode lt character string to be searched gt Specify the character string to b
384. t s pracma sre 4 Files Mema pracma DI praqma EI 4 4 include Testz h GR test3 c include Testi h 4 EE testte Sie Include Files LPCHAIN m lpTop aE Test2 h LPTEXT m ptNo testlc tesic tesic ee A leac C NECTOOLSTE BIN cagS0 exe cpu 3102 devpath c iN l Ee Test fh This program is not installed normally Please inst H E Test3 h a H E Test4 h l Build Total error s O Total warningis O EOF Sion Project Related Files crtE o For Help press F1 CALF Eq KF hea ve Status bar This section describes the following items Title bar Menu bar Tool bar Window display area Status bar Drag and drop function User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 139 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Title bar The title bar displays the following information PM plus the name of the workspace or the project file file name F PH plus Sample prw C Y850_test test1_c File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Caution In file name the name of the file which is opened in the active Edit window is displayed If you wish to make it display with the path specify it with the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings View tab Menu bar The menu bar consists of the following menus 1 2 3 4 5 File menu Edit menu Find menu Layer menu View menu 7 8 g Build menu Tool menu Wi
385. t with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 69 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 2 16 Selecting a word at the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Word selects a word at the caret position Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 17 Selecting a word to the left of the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the Top of Word selects the portion of the word that is to the left of the caret posi tion with range selection Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the Top of Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 18 Selecting a word to the right of the caret Selecting the Edit menu gt Select to the End of Word selects the portion of the word that is to the right of the caret position with range selection Refer to the Edit window for definitions of words Note that Select to the End of Word menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 2 19 Selecting a range to t
386. tag jump format can be entered By setting the path and tag jump here an external editor can be started up from PM plus Editor Specify the external editor Clicking the Browse button opens a reference dialog in which the editor can be selected Format of tag jump Specify the tag jump format when an external editor is used A tag jump format specific to the external editor is specified using the file name specification macro F and line number specification macro L Refer to the manual of each editor for details If the format is blank it is considered as F Examples of typical editors are shown below MIFES F L HIDEMARU jSL F 2 Function buttons Opens the Open dialog box to select the external editor Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box 326 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c File tab This tab is used to make settings related to files Figure 6 83 PM plus Settings Dialog Box File Tab PH plus Settings window Path Edit View Layer Scroll Find Replace Workspace External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File Watch Update The File Automatically If Changed by Other Process C Don t Update The File If Changed by Other Rea Appl Layer Rule in Opening File s Enable All Layer Rule s Options 2 5 Delete The Spaces and Tabs of The
387. target The specified Startup File is registered to the Project Related Files Back Cancel Help Specify the following items on this dialog box 1 Copy and Use the Sample file If this button is selected the startup file of the sample that corresponds to the register mode set in the next wizard step is copied to the project folder and registered to the project related files The name of the startup file to be reg istered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If real time OS is selected for use in the previous wizard step Add New Project Step 2 8 Select Real Time OS dialog box this button cannot be selected 98 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 2 Use the Existing file When an existing startup file is used select this radio button If Brows button is clicked the Startup File dialog box is opened to select the any startup file The name of the Startup file to be registered is displayed in The Startup File Name to register edit box as an absolute path Alterna tively the file name to
388. tartup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Do Not specify now When no startup file is specified now select this radio button In this case a startup file can be specified by selecting the project related file folder on the Project window and then selecting Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options Caution In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 is installed the Do Not specify now button is selected automatically and other items become invalid The Startup File Name to register Specify the name of the startup file to be registered If File Name button is clicked the Startup File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Startup File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name Caution If after selecting Do Not specify now for the startup file and registering the source file in the New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box and then returning to this dialog box and specifying the source file registered in the New Workspace Step 6 8 Setup Source Files dialog box as the startup file and ending the wizard as is the fol lowing
389. te file directly onto the Project window Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Deletes a selected source file from the project Compiles a selected file Opens a selected file under the set editor Opens the Assembler Options dialog box When options are set to a file the icon of the file displays in green Cancels assembler options set to a file Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file When a structured assembler source file is selected a structured assembler source file can be selected only when a project that uses a 78K Series device is active Add Source Files Delete Source File Compile Open Special Structured Assembler Options Reset Special Structured Assembler Options Properties Function name Opens the Add Source Files dialog box A source file can also be added into the project by drag ging and dropping an appropriate file directly onto the Project window Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Deletes a selected source file from the project Compiles a selected file Opens a selected file under the set editor Opens the Structured Assembler Options dialog box When options are set to a file
390. te path Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in the Copy from edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name If File Name button is clicked the Link Directive File to register dialog box is opened to select the any startup file Alternatively the file name to be specified can also be input in The Link Directive File Name to register edit box edit box either as an absolute path or a relative path using the keyboard Caution In an environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now radio button is selected automatically and this radio button becomes invalid Do Not specify now When no link directive file is specified select this radio button A link directive file can be specified by selecting a project related file folder on the Project window and then select ing Add Project Related files using the right mouse button or selecting the Tool menu gt Linker Options after exiting the wizard Caution In the environment in which a version of CA850 earlier than V2 50 has been installed the Do Not specify now button is selected automatically and other items become invalid User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 51 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 The Link Directive File Name to register Specify the name of the link directive file to be registered If File Na
391. te the source file from the project file by Project Project Settings Command When closing an IDL file the source files of the IDL file are added or deleted 13500 Build completed normally The build operation finished with O errors 13501 Error detected on termination Building resulted in build errors 13502 Stop build Build was stopped by selecting Stop Build from the Build menu 13600 Aborted to play back the key operations The ESC key was pressed while a key operation was being played back 13700 The difference was not found The compared files were the same I3701 This setting will take effect as restart the debugger The debugger to be used was changed but the new debugger is only valid the next time the debugger is started up User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE The sample link directive file is described below This file is created when the Create and Use the sample file button is selected in the New Workspace Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box or Add New Project Step 5 8 LinkDirective File dialog box The sample link directive file that is created in this process depends on the items specified on each of the wizards The combinations are shown below When Not use RTOS and Use Internal memory only are selected When Not use RTOS and Use External memory are selected When Use RX850 and Use Internal memory only are selected
392. ted in PM V3 xx s indicates the specified project file name OK Change to a new format Cancel Cancel the operation to open the project file Q2402 s The project file already exists Do you wish to rename old file to s bak and replace it The project file name that was specified in the Add New Project Step 1 8 Project Information dialog box is the same as an existing file name s indicates the specified file name Yes Overwrite the project file and save the existing file with the extension bak No Return to the window without doing anything Q2403 s The file was not found Do you wish to create it The specified file does not exist s indicates the specified file name Yes Create a vacant file with the specified file name and continue adding a source file No Make the specified file name invalid and continue adding a source file This message is not be shown until next adding the source files If this check box is checked this message is not displayed until the next source file addition 408 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES Q2404 s This file generated by the configurater Do you wish to add it to the project An attempt was made to register a source file automatically generated by the configurator to the project s indi cates the specified file name Yes Register the specified file to the project No Make the specified file invalid and do not register it to the project
393. ternal Tool dialog box 318 File Compare dialog box 320 PM plus Settings dialog box 323 User Setting dialog box 346 Font dialog box 348 Customize dialog box 350 Edit User keyword dialog box 358 Edit C Language s reserve words dialog box 360 Save the Key Operation dialog box 362 Load the Macro File dialog box 364 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Play back the Macro File dialog box 366 Entry Macro Files dialog box 368 Add the Macro file dialog box 370 Change the Macro file dialog box 372 dump850 dialog box 374 Window List dialog box 376 Shortcut List dialog box 378 About PM plus dialog box 380 CHAPTER 7 MESSAGES 382 7 1 Display Format 382 7 2 List of Fatal Error Messages 383 7 3 List of Operation Error Messages 391 7 4 List of Question Messages 404 7 5 List of Information Messages 411 APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE 413 When Not use RTOS and Use Internal memory only are selected 414 When Not use RTOS and Use External memory are selected 415 When Use RX850 and Use Internal memory only are selected 416 When Use RX850 and Use External memory are selected 417 When Use RX850 Pro and Use Internal memory only are selected 418 When Use RX850 Pro and Use External memory are selected 419 APPENDIX B QUANTITATIVE LIMIT LIST 420 INDEX 421 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM
394. text ie SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidata byte PROGBITS 7AW tidata byte tibss byte NOBITS 7AW ti bss byte tidata word PROGBI TS 7AW tidata word tibss word NOBI TS TAW tibss word tidata PROGBI TS 7AW tidata tibss NOBI TS TAW tibss Si data PROGBI T TAW sidata S DSS NOBITS TAW sibss K DATA ILOAD RW VOxffel00 data PROGBI TS TAW data sdata PROGBITS AWG sdata SDSS NOBITS AWG sbss Dss NOBITS TAW bSS K __tp TEXT TP_SYMBOL __gp_DATA GP_SYMBOL amp tp_TEXT DATA __ep DATA EP_ SYMBOL Caution The example above is for a case in which the start address of the internal RAM is Oxffe000 414 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A SAMPLE LINK DIRECTIVE FILE When Not use RTOS and Use External memory are selected Sample link directive file not use RTOS use external memory copyright and other notices SCONST LOAD R sconst PROGBI TS TAS SC OMS LA ja TEXT ILOAD RX pro_epi_ runtime PROGBITS AX pro_ epi runtime CEt PROGBITS VAX gees ie DATA LOAD RW V0x100000 data PROGBI TS 7AW data sdata PROGBI TS AWG sdata SDSS NOBITS 7AWG sbss bss NOBITS TAW bss is CONST LOAD R const PROGBITS 7A const SEDATA LOAD RW VOxff6000 sedata PROGBITS 7AW sedata sebss NOBITS TAW Sebss a SI DATA LOAD RW VOxffe000 tidat
395. th their build modes Select the checkbox of the build mode of the project for which build is to be performed The build mode of the currently active project is checked by default Build is executed in order from the top of the list To change the order select the project and use the Up or Down button Multiple projects can be selected When multiple projects have been selected and the checkbox one of the selected projects is manipulated the checkboxes of the other selected projects are manipulated likewise Function buttons Closes this dialog box Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Up Moves the selected project up within the list When the project at the top of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected project moves to the bottom of the list When multiple projects are selected this button is disabled Down Moves the selected project down within the list When the project at the bottom of the list is selected and this button is clicked the selected project moves to the top of the list When multiple projects are selected this button is disabled Caution If the project build Mode is added after closing the Batch Build dialog box the next time the Batch Build dialog box is opened the added project build mode item is added to the Build Project and Build Order to be built If the project build Mode is deleted after closing the Batch Build dialog
396. the Edit window and a range selection is assigned to the corresponding character string By selecting a button in this state the replacement is skipped continued or stopped If a character string is replaced in a file a backup file is created in the same folder The extension of the backup file is as specified in Extension of Backup File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings File tab The backup file is always created regardless of whether Make a Backup File is checked or not In a search through a file being edited a message confirming the replacement is displayed If the Yes button is selected the replacement is performed for the file being edited Meanwhile the file is not saved If the contents of an IDL file are replaced and saved the corresponding source file is saved with the same contents A read only source file line is not replaced The read only source file is skipped and the next source file is searched The following files are not searched Read only system and hidden files Binary file Contains NULL File with an inhibited extension File that cannot be opened in the write mode The following folders are not searched Windows folder and its subfolders 244 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Expand to Specified Layer dialog box This dialog box is used to expand specified layers Figure 6 37 Expand to Specified Layer Dialog Box Expand to Specifie
397. the Edit windows currently open Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Closes all the Edit windows currently open Any changes made to the files will not be saved The Project window and the Output windows cannot be closed Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Changes the names of the source files that are currently being edited Opens the Change Source File Names dialog box Updates all of the source files that are currently being edited Displays the printing status of the window currently being edited Prints the contents of the window currently being edited Opens the Print dialog box Prints the contents of the window currently being edited The Print dialog box is not opened Note that this menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Custom ize Menu tab Displays the name of the ten most recently edited or saved files Displays the name of the ten most recently opened workspaces Exits from PM plus User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 2 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu File Edit Find Layer View Project Build Tool Window Help Un
398. the Key Operations Stop Recording the Key 118 156 116 155 128 156 118 156 PM plus Settings Operations Register Ex tool Register the Macro Files Save the Key Operations stack850 116 155 Start up Ex tool 117 155 Toolbar 159 Tool Management 116 Tool menu 155 U Undo 66 143 Uninstalling 29 Update dependencies 114 153 User Setting dialog box 346 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 427 v View 151 Build Bar 88 151 Display All Object as Content 89 151 Display All Object as Icon 89 151 Display Content Icon 151 Display Object as Content Display Object as Icon 89 Ex tool Bar 88 151 Function List 88 151 Layer List 88 151 Option Bar 88 151 Output Window 88 151 Project Window 88 151 Standard Bar 88 151 Status Bar 88 151 View menu 151 w Window 157 Cascade 129 157 Open window information 157 Split 129 157 Title Horizontally 129 157 Title Vertically 129 157 To the Next Split Window 129 157 To the Next Window 129 157 To the Previous Window 130 157 Window List 130 157 Window composition 133 Window List 130 157 Window List dialog box 376 Window Management 129 Window menu 157 Window reference 133 Workspace 24 Close 62 New 39 Open 57 Save 62 428 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM
399. the OS was not stable Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0214 Failed to Undo commands Cannot undo over there Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application The undo operation could not be executed successfully because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not stable Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0215 Failed to Repeat commands Cannot repeat over there Memory may be not enough Please terminate other application The redo operation could not be executed successfully because the memory was insufficient or the OS was not sta ble Close the other applications and free up memory or restart the OS F0216 This selection is too many characters for copy operation Please select more small range The characters copied to the clipboard exceeded 16 MB Decrease the selected characters and try again F0217 Over the max instructions 64 PM plus has stopped recording When recording key operations the recorded instructions exceeded 64 which is the maximum number of recordable instructions F0218 Over the max instructions 64 PM plus has stopped loading the macro file Yd s When reading a macro file the recorded instructions exceeded 64 which is the maximum number of recordable instructions d indicates the line with the error and s indicates the character string with the error Decrease the number of instructions in the macro file and
400. the PM V3 xx In PM plus a workspace can be created by reading a project file created by the PM V3 xx Refer to 5 1 5 Opening a project file generated by the previous version Project manager V3 xx 3 Creating a workspace using a project file created by a NEC Electronics debugger simulator A workspace can be created by using a project file that has been updated the project information for PM plus ina wizard format Refer to 5 1 7 Opening a workspace Multiple projects can be registered to one workspace Refer to 5 6 3 Adding a new project to a workspace User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 33 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 3 Setting Options Related to Compilation Options related to compilation can be set for each project from the Tool menu Refer to the user s manual of the compiler for details of each option To set option individually in source file units select the appropriate file on the Project window and click the right mouse button When option is set individually the icon of the source file will change to green on the Project window Figure 4 2 Setting Options Related to Compilation ProjectwWindow OF Files Memo Project indow OF x Files Memo H Button Control 3 Project s El 7 Servo Control 2 Project s A main 5 ra a Files ae Sea Add Source Files E E test c Delete Source File test c EE testa H ae Compile testl c Include Fil A o
401. the external help files to be referenced during editing 1 Shift F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing the SHIFT F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button 2 Ctrl F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing the CTRL F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button 3 Shift Ctrl F1 Specify the external help file to open by pressing the SHIFT CTRL F1 keys The file can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button Make Backup File in Specified Folder This area specifies the folder in which the backup file is created for the file being edited If there is no specifica tion the backup file is created in the same folder as the file being edited Specify the folder by checking the box and entering the folder The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button Open Save in Specified Folder This area specifies the folder to be displayed first when a file is manipulated If there is no specification the cur rent folder is displayed Specify the folder by checking the box and entering the folder The folder can be entered directly in the text box or selected by the button Folder for Macro File Specify the folder in which macro files are saved If there is no specification the macro files are saved in the same folder as PM plu
402. the first character is a or b the second is c and the third is x or y is alb c x y Since connection has a higher priority than selection use parentheses to change the priority If parentheses are omitted one of a bcx or y is searched The regular expression indicating that one of the characters enclosed in and will appear is not sup ported It can be described using selection as follows E g abc gt a b c This means that one of a b or c will appear Display the Source File Names in the case of IDL file only details If this button is checked the source file name is also displayed for an IDL file default Match Case If this box is checked a character string that matches both the search key in Find What and the case of the characters in the search key is searched for default Match Whole Word Only only details If this box is checked a whole word match for the search key is searched for e Show File Names only details 238 1 Show All File Names with Layer Displays the names of all searched files in the Search result display window Show File Name was found string with Layer Displays only the names of files in which a match for the search key was found in the Search result display win dow with layer default Show File Name was found string without Layer Displays only the names of files in which a match for the search key was found in the Search result display win do
403. the follow ing menus When a Project Related Files folder is selected Add Project Related Files Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Assembler Options Opens the Assembler Options dialog box 170 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE When a project related file name is selected Add Project Related Files Delete Project Related Files Open Compiler Options Assembler Options Properties 7 Other Files folder Opens the Add Project Related Files dialog box Deletes a selected file Opens a selected file under the set editor Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Opens the Assembler Options dialog box Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file The user can register any file freely Double clicking a file name or pressing the Enter key after selecting a file name starts up un application in accordance with the file association Up to 100 other files can be registered per project When the mouse cursor is placed on the other file folder Other Files is displayed in a pop up menu When the mouse cursor is placed on the other file name the other file name indicated by the mouse cursor is displayed as a full path in a pop up menu Clicking the right mouse button on the other When an Other Files folder is selected Add Other Files Compiler Options Assembler Opti
404. the icon of the file displays in green Cancels structured assembler options set to a file Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file The names of the functions in C language existing in the source files are displayed Double clicking a function name or pressing the Enter key after selecting editor a function name displays the function definition line under the set When the mouse cursor is placed on the function file name the function name indicated by the mouse cursor is dis played in a pop up menu User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clicking the right mouse button on the function file name displays the following menus Add Source Files Opens the Add Source Files dialog box A source file can also be added into the project by drag ging and dropping an appropriate file directly onto the Project window Caution The source file is added at the end of the source file list The source file order can be changed using the Source File tab in the Project Settings dialog box Delete Source File Deletes a selected source file from the project Compile Compiles a selected file Open Opens a selected file under the set editor Special Compiler Options Opens the Compiler Options dialog box Reset Special Compiler Options Cancels compiler options set to a file Properties Opens the Properties dialog box to display the properties of a selected file
405. ther Finding is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Set tings Find Replace tab the word at the caret position will be stored as a search string and included in the search string history in the Find String dialog box If this check box is not checked the word will not be stored as a search string Note that Find the Word Upward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 12 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 5 Searching for a word downward Selecting the Find menu gt Find the Word Downward searches for the word at the caret position in the downward direction If Register String for Direct Search as a Candidate of further Finding is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Set tings Find Replace tab the word at the caret position will be stored as a search string and included in the search string history in the Find String dialog box If this check box is not checked the word will not be stored as a search string Note that Find the Word Downward menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 6 Replacing a character string Selecting the Find menu gt Replace opens Replace String dialog box to replace a character string 5
406. ting When the message whether the search will be performed in a file under editing is displayed the above message is displayed after selecting the No button The search string was not found into the The search character string was not detected in the specified file under using file xxx editing The processing of using file xxx was Search of the specified file currently being edited was stopped canceled Found the number of the detected search character strings Found xxx The using file xxx was replaced The replacement was performed in the specified file under editing Replaced xxx Found xxx Replaced the number of the replaced character strings Found the number of the detected search character strings The using file xxx was searched The searching was performed in the specified file under editing When Found xxx the searching was performed to the end of the file under editing this message is displayed after selecting the Find Next button Found the number of the detected search character strings 5 3 23 Searching for a character string within a project Selecting the Find menu gt Find in Project searches for a character string to which the caret is positioned or selected with range selection within all of the source files registered to a project 78 The search result are displayed in the Search result display window to be newly opened Figure 5 13 Search result display Window Displays the search charact
407. tion have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed When a character string is cut the caret position will not be changed When lines are cut the caret will be positioned to the beginning of the line following the cut position When the last line of a document is cut the caret will be positioned to the end of the new last line 5 2 4 Copying character strings Selecting the Edit menu gt Copy sends the character string or the lines selected with range selection to the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed 5 2 5 Cutting off character strings Cut for Append Selecting the Edit menu gt Cut for Append adds the contents of the character strings or the lines selected with range selection to the end of the clipboard and deletes them from the Edit window This menu item dose not erase the previous contents of the clipboard but instead appends the copy portion to the end of the contents of the clipboard If the lines selected with range selection have lower layers the contents of the lower layer lines will also be sent to the clipboard regardless of whether the layers are expanded or collapsed When a character string is cut the caret position will not be changed When
408. tions are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the dorp down list Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the Output window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 290 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Commit dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS commit command for the selected file and reflect the file in the repository The result is displayed on the Output window Figure 6 62 CVS Commit Dialog Box CVS Commit E4 a gt Commit File OK ES W860 test test ic Cancel 6 gt Log Message Help ddi F F evs exe commit m Me S c Command Sif File name Sim Log meage This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Commit Explanation of each area a Commit File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is acti
409. to ABC is assumed Operator bat ee feet Example ont value value 5 cnt 12 idx cnt idx cnt idx idx 2 cnt Conditional expression Z ee ee Example a lt b ais smaller than b a gt 10 a is larger than 10 a b a is equal to b a lt 5 ais5or less a gt 8 ais 8 or more al b a is not equal to b while statement while conditional expression process Example routine to insert 1 ten times cnt 0 while cnt lt 10 insert 1 insert 1 insertreturn return ont add cnt User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 125 break statement continue statement if statement Display message box Obtaining the character at the caret Checking the title line at the caret 126 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION Command Format break Example cnt 0 while 1 infinite loop insert 1 insert 1 insertreturn return if cnt 5 break finish after 5 loops cnt add cnt continue Example cnt 0 while cnt lt 10 if cnt 0 insert 1 insertreturn ten loops insert 1 return else continue cont if conditional expression process elseif process else process Example cnt 0 while cnt lt 10 if cnt 0 insert 0 insertreturn go back to top of while add cnt ten loops insert O return elseif cnt
410. top Build 113 153 Add New Project Step 3 8 dialog box 98 Update dependencies 114 153 Add New Project Step 4 8 dialog box 100 Build and Debug 112 153 Add New Project Step 5 8 dialog box 102 Build bar 88 151 160 Add New Project Step 6 8 dialog box 105 Build Functions 112 Add New Project Step 7 8 dialog box 107 Build menu 153 Add New Project Step 8 8 dialog box 108 Build Mode dialog box 301 Add Other Files 152 Build Settings 115 153 Add Other Files dialog box 272 Build Settings dialog box 305 Add Project Related Files 152 Add Project Related Files dialog box 270 C Add Source Files 152 Cascade 129 157 Add Source Files dialog box 266 Change Selected Source File Name dialog box 201 Add the Macro file dialog box 370 Change Selected Source File Names dialog box 203 Adding a project related file 110 Change Source FileName 64 142 Adding a source file 110 Change Source File Names dialog box 199 Adding other files 110 Change the Macro file dialog box 372 Apply Layer Rule 87 150 Character input 177 Clean 114 153 B Close 38 141 Back Jump 75 147 Close All 64 142 Batch Build 153 Close Workspace 62 141 Build Collapse 84 149 Batch Build Settings 154 Collapse All 85 149 Batch Build dialog box 299 Collapse the Specific Layer 85 149 Batch Build Settings 115 154
411. tput window User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 137 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 2 Explanation of Windows Dialog boxes This section explains each window dialog box of PM plus as follows Window Dialog box name Briefly explains the function of the window or dialog box and points to be noted In addition the screen image of the window or dialog box is illustrated Item of related operation are also explained Opening Explains how to open the window or dialog box If two of more methods of opening are listed the window or dialog box can be opened by any of them Explanation of each area Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box Function buttons Explains the operation of each button in the window or dialog box 138 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The Main window is the first window to be opened after PM plus is started To use PM plus start operation from this window Figure 6 2 Main Window Title bar Menu bar Tool bar Window display area PM plus Sample prw C 4Y850_test testt _c File Edit Find Layer View Project Bull Tool window Biel Es je osassa kea 34 lagi main Servo Control Debug Build z SE ie i BP c Wv900_testwtesti c MEE f Tashan haa ESO Beat Teste idi 4 E Eensa Samp i testi c t Hy Button Control 3 Projectie Testi c 4 Fla Servo Control 2 Projec
412. tus bar 88 CON O OF W N Displaying the Project window 88 9 Displaying the Output window 88 10 Displaying an object as contents or icon 89 naaa Y 11 Displaying all objects as contents 89 naaa a 5 12 Displaying all objects as icons 89 Project Management 90 5 6 1 Creating a project file 90 Selecting active project 90 Adding a new project to a workspace 91 Inserting a project into a workspace 109 CVS update 109 CVS commit 109 CVS log 109 CVS status 109 CVS comparison 110 CO N O ao A W N 10 Exporting a make file 110 11 Setting project information 110 12 Adding a source file 110 13 Adding a project related file 110 14 Adding other files 110 16 Changing a project group name 111 o oS e a O a a O e O a 17 Changing a project title 111 a aaa a 6 18 Moving a project 111 Build Functions 112 5 7 1 Building and Debugging 112 5 7 2 Rebuilding and Debugging 112 5 7 3 Compiling 112 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 15 Making the Active Project Selection combo box active 110 13 aoaaa n si oe Se ae a age oe tae cae E AL oO N O OO A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Building 113 Stopping build 113 Rebuilding 113 Batch building 113 Batch Rebuilding 113 Updating dependency relationship of files 114 Cleaning 114 Editing 114 Debug
413. two byte code cannot be used in the file name 254 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Save as type Specify the type extension of the file to be saved Select the file type from the drop down list From this drop down list Function List Tag File txt or Function List Csv File csv can be selected If Function List Tag File is selected the function list is saved to a file of tag jump format If Function List Csv File is selected the function list is saved to a CSV file CSV file can be read by spreadsheet software By default Function List Tag File is selected Tag File F sample 5RC 5END C 80 Soushin Eakunin F sample SRC SEMD C 152 Pantilt F sample SRC SEND C 316 Test Yamanashi F sample SRC 5END C S28 Send Test F sample SRC SEMD C 360 Pan Test F sample SRCERECEVE C 16 Jyushin The names of files defined in the functions Defined line number Function name CSV File Fi sample sRC SEND C 24 Soushin FP sample sRC SEND C 80 Soushin Eakunin F Fsample 5RC 5END C 162 Pantilt F sample sRC S5END C 316 Test_Yamanashi F sample 5RC S5END C 328 Send Test F sample sRC S5END C 560 Pan Test F sample s5RC RECEVE C 16 yushin The names of files defined in the functions Defined line number Function name Function buttons Saves the function list to the specified file Does not
414. types opens the Select the way of Function Prototypes dialog box in which a function prototype can be created automatically 5 2 25 Inserting a new object Selecting the Edit menu gt Insert New Object opens the Insert Object dialog box to insert a new embedded object In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 5 2 26 Setting links for objects Selecting the Edit menu gt Link opens the Links dialog box to edit link objects change sources and cancel links In the dialog box the processing depends on MFC Microsoft Foundation Class 5 2 27 Object Selecting the Edit menu gt Object the end of the menu list starts an application and converts a file type fora selected object The character strings and functions displayed on this menu item differ depending on the type of the selected object Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM T1 CHAPTER 5 METHOD OF OPERATION 5 3 Search Functions 5 3 1 Searching for a character string Selecting the Find menu gt Find opens Find String dialog box to search for a character string 5 3 2 Searching for a character string upward Selecting the Find menu gt Find Upward searches for a specified character string in the upward direction toward the beginning of the text If you have not specified a character string to search for the Find String dialog box will be opened If Don t Stop Finding at Top Line End Line is checked
415. urce file name selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Explanation of each area a File name Specify the newly set file name Up to 259 characters can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name The file name selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box is displayed in the default condition b Folder The current folder is displayed Clicking the button opens the dialog box to select the folder User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 201 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c Comment Mark The current comment mark is displayed If the contents of the Edit window is a C source is selected by default Otherwise a semicolon is selected by default Clicking the Original Mark or Setting button opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box Function buttons Changes the IDL file name to the specified file name Cancel Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Setting Opens the Set Comment Mark dialog box in which the comment mark for the specified file can be changed 202 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Selected Source File Names dialog box This dialog box is used to rename multiple source files selected in the Change Source File Names dialog box Figure 6 18 Change Selected Source File Names Dialog Box Change Selected Source File Names x a Extension CE asm C
416. urrently selected build mode and selects the build mode registered at the top Note that Debug Build and Release Build cannot be deleted If a language product that does not support build mode is used this button is invalid 302 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Build Mode dialog box This dialog box is used to add a new build mode There are two default build modes Release Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is not output Debug Build If build is executed in this mode symbol information is output In this dialog box options can be added and deleted and any build mode can be defined based on these build modes Figure 6 68 Add Build Mode Dialog Box Add Build Mode Xx a Build Mode OK Cancel Help ddi 6 Copy Build Mode from Debue Build bd This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Build menu gt Select Build Mode and select the Add button in the Build Mode dialog box Explanation of each area a Build Mode The name of the build mode to be added newly is entered in this area Up to 128 characters can be entered b Copy Build Mode from The currently set build mode is displayed by default Select the build mode using this combo box as required User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 303 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function button
417. utton is disabled Fixed Recent List Specifies the number of histories that are not to be changed during file workspace history updating when file workspace is opened or saved The number of histories that are not to be changed can be set from 1 to 5 The default number is 2 When selected the specified number of histories from the top history in the Recent List is not changed By default this check box is not checked The background color of unchanged histories in the Recent List is displayed in light blue Function buttons Button Function K Cancel Help ir Enables the specified settings Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 331 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE e Source File by idl File tab This tab is used to make settings related to the source files generated by IDL files Figure 6 85 PM plus Settings Dialog Box Source File by idl File Tab PH plus Settings window Path Edit View Layer Scroll Find Replace Workspace External Editor File Recent Source File by idl File C Always Open New Files f Display Message If Source Files Updated Layer Option as Update C Not Apply Layers f Recover Layers Follow Layer Rule No Replace C Replace Tab C Replace Space Wot Ren are lapen i 4 Convert Tabs to Space in Saving a Source File Cancel H
418. ve Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 291 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Log Message Enter the log message to be added when commit is executed c Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the dorp down list Function buttons Button Function OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the Output window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set the folder that includes cvs exe using the PATH variable of OS Set the repository of CVS If the CVS server is being used log onto the server 292 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE CVS Log dialog box This dialog box is used to execute the CVS log command for the selected file and display the file s log contents in the Output window Figure 6 63 CVS Log Dialog Bo
419. w without layer User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Find Searches for a character string that matches the search key Opens the Search result display window to display the search results Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Details gt gt Updates the Find in Files dialog box and displays the detailed version If this button is Details lt lt clicked while this dialog box is the detailed version the dialog box changes back to the origi nal Find in Files dialog box Help Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The search results are displayed under File name searched line number contents of searched line up to 5119 characters the lines after the 5120th character are not displayed User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 239 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Replace in Files dialog box This dialog box is used to replace a character string in multiple files in a specified folder When the replacement in files is performed the History of Replace in files window Is opened to display the search key replacement character string file type and searched folder The contents of the history contains the names of search files numbers of the lines for which the replacement was performed and the information of the lines before the replace ment While a file is being searched replaced the name of the file currently being searched is displayed in the lower part of th
420. witch statement corresponding to a case or default statement the layer rule is not applied 1 void Set Statusfint State 24 swwitch Statelt The case statement is subjected to the layer rule if the specified edit range extends case 0K50 77 from the switch statement in the third line to the sith line mm ntate State break If the range selection does not extend to the breakpoint of a case or default statement the layer rule is not applied 1 void Set Statusfint State 21 siwitch Statel 47 IF the third to eighth lines are specified as an edit range case 0K50 77 Indented mm notate State break case OFF A Not indented m_notate OFF default m_n tate Null 250 Users Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function List dialog box This dialog box is used to lists the functions of the file displayed in the active Edit window If multiple Edit windows are open the function list is updated when any position in the Function List dialog box is clicked after updating the active win dow Figure 6 40 Function List Dialog Box 0 all m 2 b Function This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Caution Opening Select the View menu gt Function List User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 251 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of each area a Buttons Jumps to the function definition line in the Edit window when a
421. wsNT 4 0 Workstation SP3 or later or WindowsXP User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM T7 Related Documents When using this manual also refer to the following documents Some related documents may be preliminary versions Note however that whether a related document is preliminary is not indicated in this document Documents related to 78K Series development tools User s Manual CC7BKO Ver 3 60 C Compiler RA78KO Ver 3 70 Assembler Package RA78KOS Assembler Package RA78K4 Assembler Package ID78KOS NS Ver 2 52 Integrated Debugger U16584E ID78K4 NS Ver 2 52 Integrated Debugger ID78KO QB Ver 2 81 Integrated Debugger 8 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM Documents related to V850 Series development tools User s Manual CA850 Ver 2 70 C Compiler Package ID850NW Ver 2 51 Integrated Debugger Operation U16454E ID850NWC Ver 2 51 Integrated Debugger U16525E ID850QB Ver 2 80 Integrated Debugger U16973E SM850 Ver 2 50 System Simulator U16218E SM850 Ver 2 00 or later System Simulator External Part User Open Interface U14873E Specifications RX850 Ver 3 13 or later Real Time OS Basics U13430E RX850 Pro Ver 8 19 Real Time OS RD850 Pro Ver 3 01 Task Debugger U13916E User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 9 CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 23 1 J Overview 23 1 2 Functions and Features 25 1 3 Positioning of PM plus 26 1 4 Operating Environments 27 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 29 CHAPTER 3 START
422. x CWS Log x a File WSO test testi ES W860 test testl c Cancel 6 Gommand Mf Filename Hel E prone be This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Caution Opening Select the Project menu gt CVS Log Explanation of each area a File The name of the file for which the command is to be executed is displayed The file is determined as follows If the Project window is active Selected source file name function name include file name project related file name or other file name If the Edit window is active File name on the Edit window or name of generated file at the caret position if idl file User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 293 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE b Command The command to be executed is displayed f indicates the name of a file currently selected for command execu tion Command options can be added here to set detailed options related to CVS The added command options are executed when the CVS command is executed Up to 10 executed commands are stored and can be selected from the dorp down list Function buttons OK Executes the specified command The result is displayed on the Output window Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box Caution The following operations must be performed before executing this menu item Set th
423. x executes a symbol reset when a file is downloaded Caution This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active 3 Execute CPU Reset after Download Checking this box executes a CPU reset via the debugger when a file is downloaded c Debug Options 1 Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Checking this check box downloads the debug target files of the projects belonging to the same project group as the currently active project following the files specified by Debug Target File This is a function corresponding to the multiple load module files download function of the debugger Caution This menu item become valid only when a project that uses a V850 Series device is active 314 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Debug Target File List Select the debug target files to be downloaded in the same group If the Download the debug target files in the same project group check box is checked the files checked here are downloaded when the debugger starts up following the files specified by Debug Target File When the files specified here are downloaded the symbol and CPU resets are not executed The debug target files set in each project are displayed on the list Therefore to change the debug target files in each project make the project that generates the corresponding debug target files active and open this dialog box Caution Thi
424. y the name of the macro file to be loaded Only a file name with extension imc can be specified Blanks and two byte code cannot be used in the file name 364 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Opens the specified file Does not enable the settings and closes this dialog box Opens the help for this dialog box User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 365 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Play back the Macro File dialog box This dialog box is used to read the key operation from a saved macro file and execute the macro Figure 6 105 Play back the Macro File Dialog Box Play back the Macro File E Program Files HEC_ tool Macro a Look in E Macro delime Files of type Macro Filet imc Cancel Help ee 0 This section describes the following items Opening Explanation of each area Function buttons Opening Select the Tool menu gt Play back the Macro File Explanation of each area a Lookin This area displays the folder containing the macro file to be executed The folder name specified in Folder for Macro File on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Path tab is displayed If there is no specification the folder will be the same as the folder when PM plus was started up The folder in which the file is to be saved cannot be changed here To change the folder change the specification of Folder for Macro File on
425. yboard tab This tab sets the options for the keyboard Figure 6 96 Customize Dialog Box Keyboard Tab Oper Insert file Glose New Workspace Open Workspace nave Workspace Close Workspace Press new shortcut key Cancel Help Menu This area is used to select a menu that includes the menu item to assign keys from the dorop down list Menu List This area lists the menu items included in the menu selected from Menu Select a menu item to which a short cut key is assigned Key This area displays the keys that are currently assigned to the menu item selected in Menu List Press new shortcut key Move the focus to the text box and type the desired key to display that key in the text box To execute a menu item using a two stroke key entry enter the second key following the first However if a key cannot be used as a shortcut it is not displayed If the entered key has already been assigned to another menu item the current assignment of the shortcut key is displayed as Currently assigned to If the second key is assigned to the first key it is displayed as Prefixed Key Multiple keys can be assigned to one command User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 351 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Caution The following key allocations are not possible so allocate different keys ALT A ALT D ALT E ALT SHIFT A ALT SHIFT D ALT SHIFT E The shortcut keys for Help menu gt
426. yed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 30 Moving the caret up by one line Selecting the Find menu gt One Line Up moves the caret up by one line If range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that One Line Up menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item display specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 31 Moving the caret down by one line Selecting the Find menu gt One Line Down moves the caret down by one line If range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves regardless of whether Release Range Selected Before Jump is checked on the Tool menu gt PM plus Settings Edit tab Note that One Line Down menu item is not displayed in the default condition If you wish to make this menu item dis play specify it with the Tool menu gt Customize Menu tab 5 3 32 Moving the caret one character to the right Selecting the Find menu gt One Character Right moves the caret one character to the right If range selection has been performed the selected range is released and the caret moves regardless of wh
427. yer View Project Build Tool Window Help P Files Memo F Mo Workspace For Help press F Caution Multiple PM plus cannot be activated Therefore if an attempt is made to start PM plus while PM plus has already run already running PM plus will be displayed on the forefront 3 2 Exiting To exit PM plus select the File menu gt Exit PM plus on the Main window or select the Close button User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 31 CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 1 Overview This chapter describes the operation flow from project registration to debugging for first time users of PM plus using the following organization Figure 4 1 Operation Flow until Debugging Creating Workspace Setting Options Related to Compilation Selecting Active Project Selecting Debugger Executing Build Other Settings 32 User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 QUICK TOUR 4 2 Creating Workspace The development flow using PM plus begins with the registration of a project In order to register a project a workspace to manage it must be created A workspace can be created using one of the following three methods Refer to the appropriate method in accordance with the environment used 1 Creating a new workspace A new workspace can be created by specifying the necessary project information in order in a wizard format Refer to 5 1 6 Creating a new workspace 2 Creating a workspace using a project file created by
428. yers 85 149 85 149 Expand to Specified Layer dialog box 245 84 149 Explanation of windows dialog boxes 138 110 152 External toolbar 162 88 151 Expand the Specific Layer Expand Collapse Export Makefile Ex tool Bar User s Manual U16934EJ1VOUM 423 F Features 25 File 38 141 Change Source FileName 64 142 Close 38 141 Close All 64 142 Close Workspace 62 141 Destroy All 64 142 Exit PM plus 65 142 History of files 65 History of the workspaces 65 Insert file 38 141 New 38 141 New Workspace 141 Open 38 141 Open Workspace 57 141 Print 65 142 Print Direct 65 142 Print Preview 64 142 Recent File 142 Recent Workspace 142 Save 63 141 Save All 63 142 Save All Source Files 64 142 Save and Close All 64 142 Save As 63 141 Save Workspace 62 141 File Compare 117 155 File Compare dialog box 320 File Management 38 File menu 141 Find 72 146 Back Jump 75 147 Direct Search 82 148 Find 72 146 Find Downward 72 146 Find in Files 76 147 Find in Project 78 147 Find the Word Downward 73 146 Find the Word Upward 72 146 Find Upward 72 146 Mark Jump 73 147 Next Tag Jump 80 147 Next Tag Jump Upward 80 147 One Character Left 82 148 One Character Right 81 148 One Line Down 81 148 One Line U

PM plus Ver. 5.20 UM - Renesas Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents